644839
4
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/324
Pagina verder
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you
can refer to it at any time.
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps
to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When
your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff is
specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. Your
Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
Congratulations Your selection of a 2001 Honda Civic was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
00/08/10 11:51:24 31S5P600_002
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement.
on the car.
how to use this car correctly and safely.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Messages
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Labels
Instructions
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
00/08/10 11:51:36 31S5P600_003
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-
ties, and technical information.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new Honda, and
how to contact us for any reason.
Refer to your warranty manual for
detailed information.
This section covers several
problems motorists sometimes
experience, and details how to
handle them.
Tips on cleaning and protecting
your car. Also some things to look
for if your car ever needs body
repairs.
The Maintenance Schedule shows
you when you need to take your
car to the dealer. There is also a
list of things to check and
instructions on how to check them.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
What gasoline to use, how to
break-in your new car, and how to
load luggage and other cargo.
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, and the audio
system.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your car’s
seat belts, an overview of the
Supplemental Restraint System,
and valuable information on how
to protect children with child
restraints.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and
gauge, and how to use the controls
on the dashboard and steering
column.
A summary of information you need
when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Contents
...............Your Car at a Glance . 2
....Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
.....................................Index . I
Service Information Summary
.....Instruments and Controls . 57
..............................Driving . 175
Comfort and Convenience
............................Features . 107
...................Before Driving . 161
......................Maintenance . 195
................Appearance Care . 255
Taking Care of the
.......................Unexpected . 263
.........Technical Information . 291
Warranty and Customer
Relations
........(U.S. and Canada only) . 305
Authorized Manuals
.........................(U.S.only) .311
1
00/08/10 11:51:55 31S5P600_004
Your Car at a Glance
2
AAIIRRBBAAGGSS
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK
((PP.. 1100,, 4477))
((PP.. 8888))
((PP.. 8844))
PPOOWWEERR
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK
SSWWIITTCCHH
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
((PP.. 9966))
((PP.. 116633))
((PP.. 116644))
((PP.. 118800))
((PP.. 117788))
((PP.. 110088))
((PP.. 112211,, 113333,, 114455))
((PP.. 111166,, 112288,, 114400))
00/08/10 11:52:02 31S5P600_005
Your Car at a Glance
3
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS
((PP.. 7700,, 7722))
((PP.. 7722,, 7733))
((PP.. 7744))
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
((PP.. 7744))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
((PP.. 7777))
((PP.. 7755))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH
((PP.. 7766))
((PP.. 9988))
((PP.. 9999))
00/08/10 11:52:08 31S5P600_006
4
00/08/10 11:52:10 31S5P600_007
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
andchildreninyourcar.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 16
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 21
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 22
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
...............................Children . 22
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 24
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 24
...Additional Safety Precautions . 25
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 26
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 37
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 41
...Using the Lower Anchorages . 42
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 44
..Seat Belt System Components . 44
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 45
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 46
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 48
........................SRS Components . 48
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 48
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 51
How The Side Airbag Indicator
............................Light Works . 52
.............................Airbag Service . 53
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Safety Labels . 55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
00/08/10 11:52:15 31S5P600_008
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your car is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and
your passengers always wear your
seat belts, and wear them properly.
(See page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
16
21
14
200
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
00/08/10 11:52:27 31S5P600_009
Your car is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
7
((44))
((55))
((66))
((22))
((88))
((99))
((88))
((77))
((1100))
((11)) ((33))
((22))
((77))
((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee
((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonnee
((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss
((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss
((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn
((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss
((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss
((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss ((OOppttiioonnaall))
((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss
((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss
00/08/10 11:52:35 31S5P600_010
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your car is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your car has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
00/08/10 11:52:44 31S5P600_011
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
car’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
What you should do:
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
00/08/10 11:52:53 31S5P600_012
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Your car also has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags.
Airbags
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
10
00/08/10 11:53:04 31S5P600_013
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthecar,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Your car’s seats are designed to keep
you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the car is
moving.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the car during a crash. It also helps
prevent occupants from accidentally
opening a door and falling out, and
outsiders from unexpectedly opening
your doors.
Seats & Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Door Locks
What you should do:
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
11
00/08/10 11:53:13 31S5P600_014
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your car’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
Both doors are closed and locked
(see page ).
16
21
13
14
15
171
13
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
00/08/10 11:53:25 31S5P600_015
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed and
locked.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the car is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the car during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
37
83
CONTINUED
Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
00/08/10 11:53:36 31S5P600_016
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
move the seat as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while still
maintaining full control of the car.
Also make sure your front seat
passenger moves the seat as far to
the rear as possible.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injuredifthefrontairbaginflates.
90
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
00/08/10 11:53:46 31S5P600_017
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
90
93
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
00/08/10 15:22:43 31S5P600_018
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
16
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
00/08/10 11:54:04 31S5P600_019
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
43
75
Adjust the Steering Wheel6.
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
00/08/10 11:54:14 31S5P600_020
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
car is parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the car, or
by being struck by an inflating front
airbag. Being struck by an inflating
side airbag can result in possibly
serious injuries.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt
properly.
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
7.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
00/08/10 11:54:21 31S5P600_021
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
couldbeveryseriouslyinjuredina
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
19
00/08/10 11:54:32 31S5P600_022
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbags inflate.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
On models with side airbags, do
not attach hard objects on or near
a front door.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
20
00/08/10 11:54:38 31S5P600_023
(See page
.)
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers.
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
otherchildreninyourcar,besureto
read this section.
(See page
.)
26
37
properly
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt.
21
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
00/08/10 11:54:49 31S5P600_024
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
22
00/08/10 11:55:00 31S5P600_025
CONTINUED
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
U.S. ModelsSmall Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
23
00/08/10 11:55:12 31S5P600_026
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Your car has three seating positions
in the back seat where children can
be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
three children in your car:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your car has warning labels
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
37
13
18
16
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Canadian Models
24
00/08/10 11:55:28 31S5P600_027
Children who play in cars can
accidentally get trapped inside the
trunk. Teach your children not to
play in or around cars. Know how
to operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (See page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
89
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your car is not in use.
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Keep car keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Additional Safety Precautions
25
00/08/10 15:22:49 31S5P600_028
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
30
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants:
2.
1.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
26
00/08/10 11:55:43 31S5P600_029
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your car.
Your car has lower anchorages
installed for use with Child Restraint
Anchorage System-compatible child
seats. For more information, see
page .
34
42
CONTINUED
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Small Children:
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
00/08/10 11:55:52 31S5P600_030
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your car.
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a front-
facing child seat (see page ).
35
35
31
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Back Seats
Small children:
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
00/08/10 15:23:02 31S5P600_031
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the car during a
crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the car
with the lap part of a lap/shoulder
belt. Some child seats can be
secured to the vehicle’s lower
anchorages instead. A child whose
seat is not properly secured to the
car can be endangered in a crash.
See pages , and for
instructions on how to properly
secure child seats in this car.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
31 4235
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the car.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
00/08/10 11:56:15 31S5P600_032
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
In this car, a rear-facing child seat
can be placed in any seating position
in the back seat, but not in the front
seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
forcetokillorseriouslyinjurean
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
30
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
00/08/10 11:56:26 31S5P600_033
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s lower
anchorages, follow the instructions
on page .
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
1.
42
13
14
CONTINUED
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
00/08/10 11:56:36 31S5P600_034
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. 5.2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
00/08/10 11:56:44 31S5P600_035
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
00/08/10 11:56:50 31S5P600_036
A child who can sit up without
support, and who fits within the child
seat maker’s weight and height
limits, should be restrained in a
forward-facing, upright child seat.
In this car, the best place to install a
forward-facing child seat is in one of
the seating positions in the back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
00/08/10 11:56:59 31S5P600_037
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If you have a child seat designed to
attach to the vehicle’s lower
anchorages, follow the instructions
on page .
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the car, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
1.
42
CONTINUED
Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
00/08/10 11:57:09 31S5P600_038
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. 5.2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
00/08/10 11:57:17 31S5P600_039
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat and
wear a lap/shoulder belt.
If a child is too short for the shoulder
part of the belt to properly fit, we
recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
Protecting Larger Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible
and wears the seat belt properly.
00/08/10 11:57:25 31S5P600_040
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
However, if the belt touches or
crosses the child’s neck, the child
needs to use a booster seat.
This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page . Then check
how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, as
shown, the child is large enough to
wear the seat belt.
16
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
00/08/10 11:57:34 31S5P600_041
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Thesideairbagalsoposesrisks.If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a style that
allows the child to use the lap/
shoulder belt directly, without a
shield, as shown.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
00/08/10 11:57:46 31S5P600_042
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
16 38
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
00/08/10 11:57:57 31S5P600_043
To use the anchorage point, pivot its
cover up.
Your car has three tether anchorage
points under the rear window for
securing a tether-style child seat to
the car.
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point and tighten
the strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions.
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEE PPOOIINNTT
CCOOVVEERR
00/08/10 11:58:05 31S5P600_044
The exact location of each anchor is
marked with a small circle above the
lower anchor point.
To install a child seat designed to
attach to the lower anchorages:
Your car is equipped with lower
anchorages at the outer rear seats.
These anchorages are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom and are only to be used with
a child seat designed to attach to the
lower anchorages.
Move the seat belt buckle or
center seat belt away from the
anchorages.
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchorages.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchorage.
Put the child seat in the rear left
or right vehicle seat and attach the
child seat to the lower anchorages
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Using the Lower Anchorages
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEESS
RRiiggiidd ttyyppee
00/08/10 11:58:15 31S5P600_045
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point and tighten
the strap according to the child
seat maker’s instructions.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
4. 5.
6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppee
00/08/10 11:58:22 31S5P600_046
This seat belt has a single belt that
goes over your shoulder, across your
chest and across your hips.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the car,
be sure the belt is out of the way and
will not get closed in the door.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
31 35
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
00/08/10 11:58:33 31S5P600_047
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly. For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
If your airbags inflate, the tensioners
immediately tighten the front seat
belts to help hold the occupants in
place. The belts will remain tight
until you unbuckle them in the
normal way.
16
CONTINUED
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
00/08/10 11:58:42 31S5P600_048
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).51
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
00/08/10 11:58:50 31S5P600_049
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .259
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
00/08/10 11:58:56 31S5P600_050
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passengersairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
45
51
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
00/08/10 11:59:07 31S5P600_051
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
00/08/10 11:59:16 31S5P600_052
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Your car is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
U.S. Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Canadian Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work
50
00/08/10 15:23:14 31S5P600_053
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
ThepurposeoftheSRS
indicator light is to alert
you to a potential problem with your
front airbags. On cars with side
airbags, this light will also alert you
to a potential problem with your
automatic seat belt tensioners (page
); or your side airbags or
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (page ).
45
50
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
theSRSlightalertsyoutoa
potential problem.
00/08/10 11:59:35 31S5P600_054
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesnt
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag indicator light
comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
61
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
How The Side Airbag Indicator
Light Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
52
00/08/10 11:59:44 31S5P600_055
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
Your front and side airbag systems
(if equipped) are virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your car
serviced if:
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the seat belt
tensioners, control unit and other
related parts. Do not try to remove
or replace any airbag by yourself.
This must be done by a Honda
dealer or a knowledgeable body
shop.
Take your car to an
authorized Honda dealer as soon
as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
170
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
00/08/10 11:59:54 31S5P600_056
Push the button.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon
monoxide gas. You should have no
problem with carbon monoxide
entering the car in normal driving if
you maintain your car properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The car is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
Thecarwasinanaccidentthat
may have damaged the underside.
If you must sit in your parked car,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
With the trunk lid open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your car’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk lid open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
54
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
00/08/10 12:00:03 31S5P600_057
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISORDASHBOARD
00/08/10 12:00:21 31S5P600_058
On models without side airbags
On models with side airbags
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
56
HOOD
00/08/10 12:00:29 31S5P600_059
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 58
...............................Indicator Lights . 59
.............................................Gauges . 66
...............................Speedometer . 66
.................................Tachometer . 66
.....................................Odometer . 66
...................................Trip Meter . 67
..................................Fuel Gauge . 67
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 69
...................................Headlights . 70
............Daytime Running Lights . 71
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 71
................................Turn Signals . 72
.....................Windshield Wipers . 72
..................Windshield Washers . 73
..........................Hazard Warning . 74
.............Rear Window Defogger . 74
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 75
...............Steering Wheel Controls . 76
.............................Cruise Control . 76
...............................Keys and Locks . 79
..............................................Keys . 79
....................Immobilizer System . 80
............................Ignition Switch . 82
..................................Door Locks . 83
......................Power Door Locks . 84
...................Remote Transmitter . 85
...........................................Trunk . 88
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89
............................Seat Adjustments . 90
.............Front Seat Adjustments . 90
Driver’s Seat Height
..............................Adjustment . 91
................Driver’s Seat Armrest . 91
........................Rear Seat Access . 91
..........................Head Restraints . 93
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 94
..............................Power Windows . 96
.........................................Moonroof . 98
.............................................Mirrors . 99
....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 99
...............................Parking Brake . 100
......................................Glove Box . 101
...........................Beverage Holder . 102
.................Console Compartment . 102
........................................Coin Box . 103
...............................Center Pocket . 103
.............Accessory Power Socket . 103
......................................Coat Hook . 104
.................................Cargo Hooks . 104
..................................Cargo Net . 104
...............................Interior Lights . 105
..............................Ceiling Light . 105
...................................Spotlights . 106
........................Courtesy Lights . 106
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
57
00/08/10 12:00:35 31S5P600_060
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
58
((PP.. 8888))
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK
HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 111199,, 113311,, 114433))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
((PP.. 7777))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
((PP.. 7766))
((PP.. 8844))
MMIIRRRROORR
CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK
SSWWIITTCCHH
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
((PP.. 9988))
((PP.. 9966))
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE
((PP.. 116633))
((PP.. 111166,, 112288,, 114400))
((PP.. 110088))
((PP.. 9999))
((PP.. 116644))
00/08/10 15:23:21 31S5P600_061
CONTINUED
1
2
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Shift Lever Position Indicator for the HX is shown on page 185 .
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
U.S.:HX,LX,EX,Canada:LX,Si
59
SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 6611))
((PP.. 6622))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6611))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6622))
((PP.. 6644))
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD
BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 228800))
AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 6644))
((PP.. 227799))
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 227788))
SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((LLXX,,EEXX))
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 6633))
SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT
((PP.. 6611))
11
22
00/08/10 15:23:30 31S5P600_062
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
DX
60
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 6611))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6611))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6622))
((PP.. 6633))
((PP.. 6644))
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD
BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 227788))
((PP.. 227799))
((PP.. 228800))
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
((PP.. 6644))
((PP.. 6611))
SSEEAATT BBEELLTT RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT
00/08/10 15:23:38 31S5P600_063
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your car.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags or automatic seat
belt tensioners. On models equipped
with side airbags, this light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your side airbags or passenger’s side
airbag automatic cutoff system. For
complete information, see page .51
52
CONTINUED
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Side Airbag IndicatorSupplemental Restraint
System Indicator
61
00/08/10 12:01:11 31S5P600_064
This light has two functions:
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
cartoyourdealertohaveitchecked.
With the light on, your car still has
normal braking ability but no anti-
lock. For complete information, see
page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
1.
2.
279
278
282
192
Only on models equipped with ABS (see
page )190
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
62
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
00/08/10 12:01:22 31S5P600_065
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
See page .
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
This light comes on if the trunk lid is
not closed tightly.
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the car should flash.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
70
71
76
280
248
219
Only on models equipped with Cruise
Control System
Canadian models only
CONTINUED
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Trunk-open Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
63
00/08/10 15:23:57 31S5P600_066
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your car in for
scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages .
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
80
198 204
Indicator Lights
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Maintenance Required
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
64
00/08/10 12:01:49 31S5P600_067
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
Press and hold the select/reset
button in the instrument panel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
1.
2.
3.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
65
00/08/10 12:01:56 31S5P600_068
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your car has been driven. It
measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
On HX, LX and EX models in U.S.,
and LX and Si models in Canada
Speedometer
Tachometer
Odometer
U.S.:HX,LX,EX,Canada:LX,Si
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
66
FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE
TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE
SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNOODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR
SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR
00/08/10 12:02:07 31S5P600_069
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the car is on
level ground. It may show slightly
more or less than the actual amount
whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor
hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer by
pressing the Select/Reset button
repeatedly. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Trip Meter
Fuel Gauge
DX
67
FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE
OODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR
00/08/10 15:26:29 31S5P600_070
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
275
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Temperature Gauge
68
00/08/10 12:02:22 31S5P600_071
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The hazard warning lights switch is
on the dashboard between the
center air vents.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the moonroof, mirrors and
cruise control.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
To use the horn, press the center
pad of the steering wheel.
:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
69
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG
LLIIGGHHTTSS
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD
WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
MMAASSTTEERR
SSWWIITTCCHH
HHOORRNN
00/08/10 12:02:30 31S5P600_072
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
To change from low beams to high
beams, push the turn signal lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will light
(see page ). To return to low
beams, pull the turn signal lever
back.
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder tone when you open the
driver’s door.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off. The high beams will
stay on for as long as you hold the
lever back, no matter what position
the headlight switch is in.
63
Headlights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
70
00/08/10 12:02:39 31S5P600_073
Canadian models only
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Turntheknobontheleftsideofthe
instrument panel to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
71
00/08/10 12:02:46 31S5P600_074
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions;
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
Turn Signals Windshield Wipers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
72
00/08/10 12:02:55 31S5P600_075
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. In low speed and
high speed, the wipers run continu-
ously.
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever.
The wipers run at low speed while
you’re pulling the lever, then
complete one more sweep of the
windshield after you release it.
Windshield Washers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
73
00/08/10 12:03:03 31S5P600_076
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
theinsideoftherearwindowcanbe
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your car is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on. If you do not turn it off, the
defogger will shut itself off after
about15minutes.Italsoshutsoff
when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the car.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning
74
00/08/10 12:03:12 31S5P600_077
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
1.
4.
3.
2.
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
17
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel Adjustment
75
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
car and be seriously injured in a
crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the car is stopped.
00/08/10 12:03:23 31S5P600_078
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the car under
those conditions.
1.
2.
On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,
and LX and Si models in Canada
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Controls
Cruise Control
Using the Cruise Control
76
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
00/08/10 12:03:31 31S5P600_079
CONTINUED
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The car will acceler-
ate. When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
Press and release the SET/decel
buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your car will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
3.
Steering Wheel Controls
Instruments and Controls
Changing the Set Speed
77
RREESSUUMMEE//
aacccceell
SSEETT//ddeecceell
00/08/10 12:03:43 31S5P600_080
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The car
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The car will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your car will slow down
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/decel button.
The car will then maintain the
desired speed.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Controls
Cancelling the Cruise Control
78
CCAANNCCEELL
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:03:54 31S5P600_081
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk, trunk release handle
and rear seat trunk access locked
when you leave your car and the
valet key at a parking facility. (See
Trunk, page .)
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number plate with your set of keys.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Keep the plate stored in a safe place.
When replacing keys, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.Your car comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your car:
• Ignition
• Doors
• Trunk
• Trunk release handle
• Rear seat trunk access
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out and the
car will begin to slow down. You can
use the accelerator pedal in the
normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
the RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light comes on,
and the car will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
89
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Controls, Keys and Locks
Keys
Using the
Cruise Control
79
KKEEYY
NNUUMMBBEERR
PPLLAATTEE
MMAASSTTEERR
KKEEYYSS
VVAALLEETT
KKEEYY
00/08/10 12:04:06 31S5P600_082
The Immobilizer System protects
your car from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Some models also come with two
remote transmitters; see page for
an explanation of their operation.
85
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
80
00/08/10 12:04:16 31S5P600_083
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
This indicator will also blink several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
car’s key and the ignition switch
while trying to start the engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
00/08/10 12:04:25 31S5P600_084
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. If your car has
an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must also be in Park. The anti-
theft lock will lock the steering
column when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
Instruments and Controls
Keys and Locks
LOCK (0)Ignition Switch
82
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
00/08/10 12:04:33 31S5P600_085
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power socket.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the car are usable.
Several of the lights on the instru-
ment panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY to ON.
Each door has a lock tab on the top.
Push the tab down to lock the door
andpullituptounlock.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriversdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the car, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, pull the outside
door handle and push the lock tab
down. Release the handle, then close
the door.
80
CONTINUED
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
Door LocksSTART (III)
83
00/08/10 12:04:44 31S5P600_086
The front doors can be locked and
unlocked from the outside with the
key.
To lock the driver’s door when
getting out of the car, pull the inside
door handle and push down the
master door lock switch or the lock
tab.
All doors lock when you push down
the lock tab on the driver’s door, or
lock the driver’s door from the
outside with the key. Only the driver’s
door unlocks when you use the key
or lock tab. To unlock the passen-
gers’ doors, use the master door lock
switch or the lock tab on each door.
The master door lock switch allows
control of both door locks from the
driver’s door. Push the switch down
to lock both doors, and up to unlock
them.
Standard on HX, LX and EX models in
the U.S., and LX and Si models in
Canada
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Power Door Locks
84
MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH
00/08/10 12:04:52 31S5P600_087
CONTINUED
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds after
you have locked the doors, the horn
will sound once to verify that the
doors are locked.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The remaining doors unlock when
you push the button a second time.
The parking lights, side marker
lights, and taillights flash twice.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any of the doors, the light will go out
in about 30 seconds and the doors
will automatically relock. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
You cannot lock or unlock the doors
with the remote transmitter if any
door is not fully closed or the key is
in the ignition switch.
You can lock and unlock your car
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
lock. The parking lights, side marker
lights, and taillights flash once.
Standard on EX model in the U.S., and Si
model in Canada
Optional on HX and LX models in the
U.S., and on LX in Canada model
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
LLEEDD
UUNNLLOOCCKK
BBUUTTTTOONN
LLOOCCKK
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPAANNIICC
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:05:02 31S5P600_088
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the trans-
mitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
When the remote transmitters
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors, and the
LED will get dim. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your car’s horn and exterior
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash, for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode,pressandholdthePANIC
button for about one second.
To cancel PANIC mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Instruments and Controls
Keys and Locks
Replacing the BatteryPanic Mode
86
OOppeenn
CClloossee
RROOUUNNDD
CCOOVVEERR
CCUUSSHHIIOONN
RRIINNGG
BBAATTTTEERRYY
00/08/10 12:05:14 31S5P600_089
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your car’s system by
your Honda dealer. Any other
transmitters you have will also need
to be reprogrammed.
Reinstall the cushion ring. Align the
mark on the cover with the
mark on the transmitter,
thensetthecoverinplaceandturnit
clockwise.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Transmitter Care
87
00/08/10 12:05:24 31S5P600_090
Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
trunk lock. The valet key does not
work in this lock.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else, lock the trunk release handle
with the master key and give the
other person the valet key.
54
171
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
88
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY
MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY
00/08/10 12:05:35 31S5P600_091
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
As a safety feature, your car has a
release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
25
U.S. models only
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
89
00/08/10 12:05:44 31S5P600_092
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethelever.Trytomovethe
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
to the desired position and release
the lever. Let the seat-back latch in
the new position.
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
90
00/08/10 12:05:52 31S5P600_093
To adjust the height of the driver’s
seat, turn the dial on the outside of
the seat bottom.
To use the driver’s seat armrest,
pivotitdown.
To get into the back seat on the
driver’s side, pull up on the seat-back
adjustment lever.
To tilt the passenger’s seat-back out
of the way, push down on the release
lever at the base of the seat-back.
CONTINUED
On EX model in the U.S., and Si model
in Canada
On EX model in the U.S., and Si model
in Canada
On HX, EX and LX models in the U.S.,
and Si model in Canada
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Armrest Rear Seat Access
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
91
00/08/10 12:06:04 31S5P600_094
Push the passenger’s seat-back while
pushingdownonthereleaseleverto
tilt the seat-back out of the way. The
entire seat will slide forward at the
same time. Adjust the seat-back angle to the
desired position with the adjustment
lever on the outside of the seat
bottom.
To get into the back seat on the
passenger’s side, push back on the
release lever at the base of the seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward
and the entire seat will move forward
to allow easier entry to the back seat.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
On HX model in the U.S., and all
Canadian models
OnEXandLXmodelsintheU.S.
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
Front Passenger’s Seat with Position
Memory
92
00/08/10 12:06:10 31S5P600_095
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust the restraint. Do not attempt
to adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways
and push the restraint down.
The front head restraints help
protect you and your passenger from
whiplash and other injuries. They are
most effective when you adjust them
so the back of the occupants head
rests against the center of the
restraint. A taller person should
adjust the restraint as high as
possible.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
15
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
Head Restraints
93
RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:06:18 31S5P600_096
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you direct access to the trunk.
Each side folds down separately.
With only half the seat folded, you
can still carry a passenger in the
back seat. The seat-back can be
released from inside the car or inside
the trunk.
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
To fold down either side of the seat-
back from inside the car, insert the
master key in the lock on the rear
shelf. To fold down the drivers side,
turn the key clockwise, pull down the
top of the seat-back, then release the
key. To fold down the passenger’s
side, turn the key counterclockwise
and perform the same procedure.
Folding Rear Seat
Instruments and Controls
94
00/08/10 12:06:25 31S5P600_097
To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down, then let go of the release.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back whenever the seat-back is in its
upright position.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .54
171
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Folding Rear Seat
Instruments and Controls
95
RREELLEEAASSEE
00/08/10 12:06:34 31S5P600_098
Your car’s windows are electrically-
powered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON(II)toraiseorloweranywindow.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open any of the passengers’ win-
dows, push down on the appropriate
switchandholditdownuntilthe
window reaches the desired position.
To close the window, pull back on
the window switch. Release the
switch when the window gets to the
position you want.
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and
LXandSimodelsinCanada
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and
LXandSimodelsinCanada
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
96
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
00/08/10 12:06:41 31S5P600_099
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down and release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way down. To stop the window
from going all the way down, pull
back on the window switch briefly.
To open the driver’s window only
partially, push the window switch
down lightly and hold it. The window
will stop as soon as you release the
switch.
The AUTO function only works to
lower the driver’s window. To raise
the window, you must pull back on
the window switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passengers’ windows. With this
switch off, the passengers’ windows
cannot be raised or lowered. The
MAIN switch does not affect the
driver’s window. Keep the MAIN
switch off when you have children in
the car so they do not injure them-
selves by operating the windows
unintentionally.
AUTO
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
97
00/08/10 12:06:48 31S5P600_100
Usetheswitchesonthedashboard
under the left vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition must be ON
(II).
To lift the rear of the moonroof for
ventilation, push the button.
To slide the moonroof back, push
the switch. Hold it until the
moonroof reaches the desired
position, then release the switch.
To close the moonroof, press and
hold the switch.
On EX model in the U.S., and Si model
in Canada
Instruments and Controls
Moonroof
98
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
00/08/10 12:06:55 31S5P600_101
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the left side of
the dashboard:
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
3.
4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,
and LX and Si models in Canada
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
99
SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH
TTAABB
AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH
00/08/10 12:07:07 31S5P600_102
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page ).
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
62
On Canadian Si model
Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
100
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR
Driving the car with the parking brake
applied can damage the rear brakes
and axles.
00/08/10 12:07:14 31S5P600_103
Open the glove box by squeezing the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Glove Box
Instruments and Controls
101
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
00/08/10 12:07:20 31S5P600_104
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
Squeeze the handle and slide the
console compartment lid backward
to access the compartment.
A beverage holder for rear seat
passengers is in the back of the
console. To use it, pivot the lid down.
On EX model in U.S. On EX model in the U.S., and LX and Si
models in Canada
Beverage Holder Console Compartment
Beverage Holder, Console Compartment
Instruments and Controls
102
00/08/10 12:07:29 31S5P600_105
The coin box is located under the air
vent. To open the coin box, pull the
bottom edge. Close it with a firm
push.
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II).
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
The center pocket is located under
the audio system. To open the lid,
pull it down. Close it with a firm push.
On EX model in the U.S., and LX and Si
models in Canada
CoinBox CenterPocket AccessoryPowerSocket
Coin Box, Center Pocket, Accessory Power Socket
Instruments and Controls
103
00/08/10 12:07:39 31S5P600_106
To use a coat hook, push on the lid.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.
You can use the cargo net to secure
items in the cargo area. To install the
cargo net, hook the loops on the four
corners of the net to the tabs at both
sides of the tailgate sill.
On EX models in the U.S.
Coat Hook Cargo Hooks Cargo Net
Coat Hook, Cargo Hooks
Instruments and Controls
104
00/08/10 12:07:49 31S5P600_107
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open any door. In the ON
position, the ceiling light stays on
continuously.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 10 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter (see
page ).
Your car also has a front ceiling light
between the sun visors.
85
On EX model in the U.S., and Si model
in Canada
Ceiling Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
105
00/08/10 12:07:57 31S5P600_108
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
button next to each light. Push the
button again to turn it off. You can
use the spotlights at all times.
Your car also has a courtesy light in
the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It remains on for several seconds
after the door is closed.
On EX model in the U.S., and Si model
in Canada
On LX model On EX model in the U.S.
Interior Lights
Spotlights Courtesy Lights
Instruments and Controls
106
LLXX
00/08/10 12:08:07 31S5P600_109
The heating and air conditioning
systems in your Honda provide a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section de-
scribes those features and how to
use them. (If you selected an
optional audio system, refer to the
operating instructions that came
with it.)
.....................Heating and Cooling . 108
.........What Each Control Does . 108
............How to Use the System . 110
..........To Turn Everything Off . 115
......................Audio System (DX) . 116
.................Operating the Radio . 116
.................Adjusting the Sound . 120
............Audio System Lighting . 121
..............................Digital Clock . 121
Operating the Optional Cassette
.....................................Player . 122
............Tape Search Functions . 123
Operating the Optional
.............CD Player/Changer . 125
.......Audio System (U.S. HX, LX) . 128
.................Operating the Radio . 128
.................Adjusting the Sound . 132
............Audio System Lighting . 133
..............................Digital Clock . 133
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 134
............Tape Search Functions . 135
Operating the Optional
.............CD Player/Changer . 137
Audio System (U.S. EX and
...................Canadian LX, Si) . 140
.................Operating the Radio . 140
.................Adjusting the Sound . 144
............Audio System Lighting . 145
..............................Digital Clock . 145
....................Radio Frequencies . 146
........................Radio Reception . 147
.........Operating the CD Player . 149
.....Operating the CD Changer . 151
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 152
....CD Player Error Indications . 153
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 154
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 155
............Tape Search Functions . 156
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 158
.......................Theft Protection . 159
Air conditioning is standard on LX
andEXmodelsintheU.S.,andLX
model in Canada. It is optional on
other models.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
107
00/08/10 12:08:13 31S5P600_110
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for best
visibility.
If your car does not have air
conditioning, it can be installed at
any time. Your dealer can install a
Genuine Honda air conditioning
system that meets Honda’s high
quality standards and is designed to
exactly fit your car. Please contact
your dealer for more information.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the cars interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the car
(Fresh Air mode).
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
in the button lights when the A/C is
on.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).74
Standard for LX and EX models in the
U.S., and DX and LX models in Canada
Optional for other models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
Recirculation Button
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
108
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
BBUUTTTTOONN
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
00/08/10 12:08:27 31S5P600_111
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Use the MODE control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
vents in all modes.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Mode Control Dial
109
00/08/10 12:08:38 31S5P600_112
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the dashboard vents
by moving the tab in the center of
each vent up-and-down and side-to-
side.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials underneath them.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Vent Controls How to Use the System
110
SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT
CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT
OOppeenn
CClloossee
00/08/10 12:08:49 31S5P600_113
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Ventilation
111
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:08:58 31S5P600_114
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
If the interior is very warm from
beingparkedinthesun,youcancool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Start the engine.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the tempera-
ture control dial is turned all the
way to the left.
Set the fan to maximum speed.
Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
68
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
112
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:09:08 31S5P600_115
To warm the interior:
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Start the engine.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial. Switch the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
Switch the fan on.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
PresstheA/Cbuttontoturnitoff.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
To Defog and Defrost
113
00/08/10 12:09:19 31S5P600_116
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Switch the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the car has been sitting out in
cold weather:
1.
2.
3.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
114
MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:09:26 31S5P600_117
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the side vents with the dial
beside each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
You should shut the system
completely off only for the first few
minutes of driving in cold weather,
until the engine coolant warms up
enough to operate the heater. Keep
the fan on at all other times so stale
air does not build up in the interior.
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Turn Everything Off
115
00/08/10 12:09:33 31S5P600_118
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob. The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
For DX model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM Stereo Audio System
Operating the Radio
116
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:09:41 31S5P600_119
−−
CONTINUED
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob clockwise to tune to a
higher frequency, or
counterclockwise to tune to a lower
frequency.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the Preset buttons.
To change the frequency rapidly,
press and hold the top or bottom of
theSEEKbar.Releasethebarwhen
the display reaches the desired
frequency. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
and release the top or bottom of the
SEEK bar. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. The system will scan
up the band for a station with a
strong signal. When it finds one, it
will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
117
00/08/10 12:09:49 31S5P600_120
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset
118
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:10:00 31S5P600_121
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will appear in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
With Auto Select on, you can
manually store any frequencies in
the preset buttons. If you do not like
the stations found by Auto Select,
you can use the TUNE, SEEK and
SCAN functions to find other
stations.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
119
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:10:09 31S5P600_122
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level number on
the display shows you the range.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
number on the display shows you the
range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
For information, See page .146
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Radio Frequencies and Reception
120
LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:10:20 31S5P600_123
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Theaudiosystemalsodisplaysthe
time. To set the time, the ignition
switch must be in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II), and you must wait about
five seconds after performing any
other operations with the system.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, the clock is set
back to the previous hour by
pressing and holding the CLOCK
button, then pressing the RESET
(Preset 6) button. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
is set forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
Adjust the minutes by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the M (Preset 5) button.
Adjust the hours by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the H (Preset 4) button.
71
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Digital Clock
121
CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN
RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
MM BBUUTTTTOONN
HH BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:10:32 31S5P600_124
The cassette system features Dolby
B noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or optional CD
changer while listening to a tape,
press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE
button. To change back to the
cassette player, press the CD/TAPE
button.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise
reduction, turn it off by pressing the
NR button.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Optional Cassette
Player
122
00/08/10 12:10:41 31S5P600_125
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
The Skip Function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To find the beginning of
the song or passage currently
playing, push the lower part of the
SKIP bar. You will see REW flashing
in the display as the tape rewinds. To
find the beginning of the next song,
push the upper part of the SKIP bar.
You will see FF flashing in the
display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the
beginning of a song or passage, it
goes back to PLAY mode.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
SKIP
123
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSKKIIPP BBAARR
NNRR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:10:50 31S5P600_126
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
158
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Caring for Cassettes
REPEAT
124
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
SSKKIIPP BBAARR
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:10:58 31S5P600_127
A trunk-mounted Compact Disc
changer is available through your
dealer. It holds up to six discs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate the CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
Your dealer also has an accessory in-
dash single CD player available that
is operated by the radio controls. To
operate this unit, use the instructions
(except for those relating to multiple
discs) in this section.
To operate the CD changer or player,
the ignition must be in ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) and the audio system
must be on.
CONTINUED
Operating the Optional CD
Player/Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
125
RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONNCCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONNSSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR
00/08/10 12:11:08 31S5P600_128
+−
Press the CD/TAPE button. You will
see ‘‘CDC’’ in the display. The
system will start to play the first
track of the first disc. When that disc
ends, the next disc in the magazine
is loaded and played. After the last
disc finishes, the system returns to
disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
DISC (Preset 6) or DISC
(Preset5)button.Thenextdiscin
the changer is loaded and played
when you press the DISC button.
DISC loads and plays the previous
disc. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
Press the EJECT button to remove
the disc from the player.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Using the instructions that came
with the changer, load the desired
CDs in the magazine, and load the
magazine in the changer. Play only
standard round discs. Odd-shaped
CDs may jam in the drive or cause
other problems.
Insert the disc into the CD slot. Push
the disc in halfway, the drive will pull
it in the rest of the way. Push the
CD/TAPE button and the disc will
start to play.
You will see the track number being
played in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. In all
cases, play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Changer
CD Player
126
00/08/10 12:11:19 31S5P600_129
When you activate the
RepeatfeaturebypressingtheRPT
button, the system continuously
replays the current track. You will
see RPT in the display as a reminder.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on a
CD in random order, rather than in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
the RDM button. You will see RDM
in the display. The system will then
select and play tracks randomly on
the current disc. When all tracks on
that disc have been played, the next
disc is loaded and played randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again.
If you push and hold the SEEK/
SKIP bar, the system will continue to
move across tracks. Release the bar
when you think it has reached the
desired place on the disc.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar to
select tracks within a disc. If you
press and release the SEEK/SKIP
bar, the system will move to the
beginning of a track. Press the
side to move to the beginning
of the next track, and the side
to move to the beginning of the
current track.
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button or insert a
cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the CD/TAPE button. When you
return to CD mode, play will contin-
ue at the same point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
For information, See page .
For information, See page .
152
153
154
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Protecting Compact Discs
CD Player Error Indications
CD Changer Error Indications
CD Player and Changer
127
00/08/10 12:11:32 31S5P600_130
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
B noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
For HX and LX models in the U.S.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette Stereo Audio
System
Operating the Radio
128
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:11:42 31S5P600_131
−−
CONTINUED
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob clockwise to tune to a
higher frequency, or
counterclockwise to tune to a lower
frequency.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the Preset buttons.
To change the frequency rapidly,
press and hold the top or bottom of
theSEEKbar.Releasethebarwhen
the display reaches the desired
frequency. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
and release the top or bottom of the
SEEK bar. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. The system will scan
up the band for a station with a
strong signal. When it finds one, it
will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
129
00/08/10 12:11:51 31S5P600_132
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset
130
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:12:02 31S5P600_133
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will appear in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
With Auto Select on, you can
manually store any frequencies in
the preset buttons. If you do not like
the stations found by Auto Select,
you can use the TUNE, SEEK and
SCAN functions to find other
stations.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
131
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
00/08/10 12:12:11 31S5P600_134
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level number on
the display shows you the range.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
number on the display shows you the
range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
For information, See page .146
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Radio Frequencies and Reception
132
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:12:22 31S5P600_135
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
The audio system usually shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). It
shows the operation mode of the
radio, cassette player, or optional CD
changer when you operate them,
then goes back to the time display
after five seconds. Adjust the hours by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the H (Preset 4) button.
Adjust the minutes by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the M (Preset 5) button.
You can set the time only when the
clock is displayed.
If an error occurs while operating
the optional CD player or changer,
the display will keep showing the
error code and will not switch to the
time display until the error is
corrected (see pages and ).
71
154153
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Digital Clock
133
CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN
RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
MM BBUUTTTTOONN
HH BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:12:34 31S5P600_136
Turn the audio system ON. Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, the clock is set
back to the previous hour by
pressing and holding the CLOCK
button, then pressing the RESET
(Preset 6) button. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
is set forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
1:06 would RESET to 1:00
1:52 would RESET to 2:00
For example:
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT
BBUUTTTTOONN
CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT
NNRR
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
SSKKIIPP BBAARR
NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:12:44 31S5P600_137
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
Dolby B noise reduction turns on
when you insert a cassette. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby B
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
The Skip Function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To find the beginning of
the song or passage currently
playing, push the lower part of the
SKIP bar. You will see REW flashing
in the display as the tape rewinds. To
find the beginning of the next song,
push the upper part of the SKIP bar.
You will see FF flashing in the
display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the
beginning of a song or passage, it
goes back to PLAY mode.If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or optional CD
changer while listening to a tape,
press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE
button. To change back to the
cassette player, press the CD/TAPE
button.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP
FF/REW
Tape Search Functions
135
00/08/10 12:12:53 31S5P600_138
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
158
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
Caring for Cassettes
136
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEPPEEAATT
BBUUTTTTOONN
CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT
NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN SSKKIIPP BBAARR
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:13:02 31S5P600_139
CONTINUED
Your dealer also has an accessory in-
dash single CD player available that
is operated by the radio controls. To
operate this unit, use the instructions
(except for those relating to multiple
discs) in this section.
A trunk-mounted Compact Disc
changer is available for your dealer.
It holds up to six discs, providing
several hours of continuous
entertainment. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio and cassette player.
To operate the CD changer or player,
the ignition must be in ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) and the audio system
must be on.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Optional CD
Player/Changer
137
RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORRAAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
RRAANNDDOOMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT
BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR
DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONN
DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:13:11 31S5P600_140
+−
Press the CD/TAPE button. You will
see ‘‘CDC’’ in the display. The
system will start to play the first
track of the first disc. When that disc
ends, the next disc in the magazine
is loaded and played. After the last
disc finishes, the system returns to
disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
DISC (Preset 6) or DISC
(Preset5)button.Thenextdiscin
the changer is loaded and played
when you press the DISC button.
DISC loads and plays the previous
disc. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
Press the EJECT button to remove
the disc from the player.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Using the instructions that came
with the changer, load the desired
CDs in the magazine, and load the
magazine in the changer. Play only
standard round discs. Odd-shaped
CDs may jam in the drive or cause
other problems.
Insert the disc into the CD slot. Push
the disc in halfway, the drive will pull
it in the rest of the way. Push the
CD/TAPE button and the disc will
start to play.
You will see the track number being
played in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. In all
cases, play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Changer
CD Player
138
00/08/10 12:13:22 31S5P600_141
When you activate the
RepeatfeaturebypressingtheRPT
button, the system continuously
replays the current track. You will
see RPT in the display as a reminder.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on a
CD in random order, rather than in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
the RDM button. You will see RDM
in the display. The system will then
select and play tracks randomly on
the current disc. When all tracks on
that disc have been played, the next
disc is loaded and played randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again.
If you push and hold the SEEK/
SKIP bar, the system will continue to
move across tracks. Release the bar
when you think it has reached the
desired place on the disc.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar to
select tracks within a disc. If you
press and release the SEEK/SKIP
bar, the system will move to the
beginning of a track. Press the
side to move to the beginning
of the next track, and the side
to move to the beginning of the
current track.
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button or insert a
cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the CD/TAPE button. When you
return to CD mode, play will contin-
ue at the same point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
For information, See page .
For information, See page .
152
153
154
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
Protecting Compact Discs
CD Player Error Indications
CD Changer Error Indications
CD Player and Changer
139
00/08/10 12:13:35 31S5P600_142
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
159
For EX model in the U.S., and LX and Si
models in Canada
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/CD Audio System
Operating the Radio
140
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSCCAANN
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:13:44 31S5P600_143
−−
CONTINUED
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob clockwise to tune to a
higher frequency, or
counterclockwise to tune to a lower
frequency.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the Preset buttons.
To change the frequency rapidly,
press and hold the top or bottom of
theSEEKbar.Releasethebarwhen
the display reaches the desired
frequency. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
and release the top or bottom of the
SEEK bar. Depending on which part
of the bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. The system will scan
up the band for a station with a
strong signal. When it finds one, it
will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
141
00/08/10 12:13:52 31S5P600_144
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
To store a frequency:
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset
142
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
TTUUNNEE BBAARR
SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:14:03 31S5P600_145
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
AUTO SELECT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
TTUUNNEE BBAARR
SSEEEEKK BBAARR
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
AAUUTTOO
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSCCAANN
BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:14:12 31S5P600_146
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level number on
the display shows you the range.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
number on the display shows you the
range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
144
LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
00/08/10 12:14:22 31S5P600_147
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
The display of your audio system
usually shows the time when the
ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II). It shows the operation
mode of the radio, CD player, or
optional CD changer/cassette player
when you operate them, and goes
back to the time display after five
seconds.
You can set the time only when the
clock is displayed.
Adjust the hours by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the H (Preset 4) button.
Adjust the minutes by pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the M (Preset 5) button.
If an error occurs while operating
the CD player or optional CD
changer, the display will show the
error code and will not switch to the
time display until the error is
corrected (see pages and ).
71
153 154
CONTINUED
Audio System Lighting
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN
MM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN
HH BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 15:26:41 31S5P600_148
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, the clock is set
back to the previous hour by
pressing and holding the CLOCK
button, then pressing the RESET
(Preset 6) button. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
is set forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
For example:
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Frequencies
146
00/08/10 12:14:44 31S5P600_149
CONTINUED
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the stations signal.
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the stations transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Reception
147
00/08/10 12:14:52 31S5P600_150
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
00/08/10 12:14:59 31S5P600_151
CONTINUED
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play that disc again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
149
CCDD SSLLOOTT
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONN
SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR
RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
EEJJEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
00/08/10 12:15:09 31S5P600_152
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the sidetoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
the RDM button. You will see RDM
in the display. The system will then
select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
RANDOM PLAY
REPEAT
150
00/08/10 12:15:20 31S5P600_153
+−
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, press the
DISC (Preset 6) or DISC
(Preset 5) button. The next disc in
the changer is loaded and played
when you press the DISC button.
DISC loads and plays the previous
disc. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (AM or FM) with the button.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
A trunk-mounted Compact Disc
changer is available for your vehicle.
It holds up to six discs, providing
several hours of continuous
entertainment. You operate this CD
changer with the same controls used
for the in-dash CD player.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
151
00/08/10 12:15:31 31S5P600_154
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip
pens, and labels can cause the CD to
not play properly, or possibly jam in
the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
152
00/08/10 12:15:40 31S5P600_155
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High temperature.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Player Error Indications
153
00/08/10 15:26:49 31S5P600_156
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High temperature.
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Changer Error Indications
154
00/08/10 15:27:00 31S5P600_157
CONTINUED
The cassette system features Dolby
B noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
155
NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
NNRR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT
BBUUTTTTOONN
SSKKIIPP BBAARR
00/08/10 12:16:09 31S5P600_158
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise
reduction, turn it off by pressing the
NR button.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Dolby remains off until you turn it on
by pressing the button again.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the PLAY button.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD button. To change
back to the cassette player, push the
CD button.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button on the cassette player.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
156
00/08/10 12:16:19 31S5P600_159
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The Skip Function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To find the beginning of
the song or passage currently
playing, push the lower part of the
SKIP bar. You will see REW flashing
in the display as the tape rewinds. To
find the beginning of the next song,
push the upper part of the SKIP bar.
You will see FF flashing in the
display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the
beginning of a song or passage, it
goes back to PLAY mode.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEATSKIP
157
00/08/10 12:16:25 31S5P600_160
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ on the display, press
the EJECT button and remove the
cassette from the unit. Make sure
the tape is not damaged. If the
cassette will not eject or the error
indication stays on after the cassette
ejects, take the car to your Honda
dealer.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Caring for the Cassette Player
158
00/08/10 12:16:36 31S5P600_161
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the radio fuse is
removed, the audio system will
disable itself. If this happens, you
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. If it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
Your car’s audio system will disable
itself if it is disconnected from
electrical power for any reason. To
make it work again, the user must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
Preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
For EX model in the U.S., and LX and Si
models in Canada
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Theft Protection
159
00/08/10 12:16:44 31S5P600_162
160
00/08/10 12:16:47 31S5P600_163
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your car,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 162
.........................................Gasoline . 162
.........Service Station Procedures . 163
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 163
....................Opening the Hood . 164
...............................Oil Check . 166
.........Engine Coolant Check . 167
...............................Fuel Economy . 168
.....................Vehicle Condition . 168
...........................Driving Habits . 168
...Accessories and Modifications . 169
.............................Carrying Cargo . 171
Before Driving
Before Driving
161
00/08/10 12:16:52 31S5P600_164
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Help assure your car’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your car’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
162
00/08/10 12:17:04 31S5P600_165
Removethefuelfillcapslowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the car, park with
that side closest to the service
station pumps.
Your car has an on-board refueling
vapor recovery system to help
keep fuel vapors from going into
the atmosphere. If the fuel pump
keeps clicking off even though the
tank is not full, there may be a
problem with this system. Consult
your dealer.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Open the fuel fill door by pushing
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Filling the Fuel Tank
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
163
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
00/08/10 12:17:15 31S5P600_166
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Standing in front of the car, put
your fingers under the front edge
of the hood to the right of center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
1. 2.
5.
6.
280
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
164
HHOOOODD
RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
LLAATTCCHH
00/08/10 12:17:24 31S5P600_167
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on
theleftsideofthehood.
Afterclosingthehood,makesureit
is securely latched.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
3.
226
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
165
SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD
00/08/10 12:17:33 31S5P600_168
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its tube.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few
minutes after turning the engine off
before you check the oil.
2. 3.
1.
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
166
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
00/08/10 12:17:42 31S5P600_169
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
4.
209
213
207
Adding
Engine Coolant
Adding Oil
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
167
LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK
MMAAXX
MMIINN
UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK
00/08/10 12:17:51 31S5P600_170
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cutdownonairconditioninguse.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
The condition of your car and your
driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Always maintain your car according
to the maintenance schedule. This
will keep it in top operating condition.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your car uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and reduces
thechanceofcorrosion.
207
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Before Driving
Fuel Economy
168
00/08/10 12:18:03 31S5P600_171
Modifying your car, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your car unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Genuine Honda
accessories that allow you to
personalize your car. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your car, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your car, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your car’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on the page for
additional information.)
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your car’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper car operation or
performance.
Before installing any accessory:
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your car’s electrical system capacity,
they can interfere with the operation
of your car, or even cause the
airbags to deploy.
170
284
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
169
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
car’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
00/08/10 12:18:15 31S5P600_172
In addition, any modifications that
decrease ground clearance increase
the chance of undercarriage parts
striking a curb, speed bump, or other
raised object, which could cause
your airbags to deploy.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Do not remove any original
equipment or modify your car in any
way that would alter its design or
operation. This could make your car
unsafe and illegal to drive.
For example, do not make any
modifications that would change the
ride height of your car, or install
wheels and tires with a different
overall diameter.
Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
the operation of the car’s anti-lock
brakes and other systems.
Do not attach or place objects on
the airbag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Modifications
Additional Safety Precaution
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
170
00/08/10 12:18:26 31S5P600_173
Your car has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability and
operation and make it unsafe. Before
carrying any type of cargo, be sure to
read the following pages.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the front doors and seat-back, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The trunk is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the back
seatcanbefoldeddowntoallowyou
to carry more cargo or longer items.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
171
FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETT
GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX
TTRRUUNNKK
CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETT
11:: UU..SS..:: EEXX mmooddeell
CCaannaaddaa:: LLXX aanndd SSii mmooddeellss
22:: UU..SS..:: HHXX,, LLXX aanndd EEXX mmooddeellss
CCaannaaddaa:: LLXX aanndd SSii mmooddeellss
11
22
00/08/10 12:18:33 31S5P600_174
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Besureitemsplacedonthefloor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
Add up the weight of all occupants.
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
The maximum load for your car is
850 lbs (395 kg).
Subtract the total from 850 lbs
(395 kg).
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
viewandbethrownaroundthecar
during a crash.
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
172
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
00/08/10 12:18:45 31S5P600_175
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the car during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you can carry any items on a
roofrack,besurethetotalweight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Honda
dealer for further information.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page .54
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
173
00/08/10 12:18:52 31S5P600_176
174
00/08/10 12:18:55 31S5P600_177
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed manual and automatic
transmissions. It also includes impor-
tant information on parking your car,
and the braking system.
........................Preparing to Drive . 176
.......................Starting the Engine . 177
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 177
....5-speed Manual Transmission . 178
.....Recommended Shift Points . 179
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 179
..............Automatic Transmission . 180
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180
................Shift Lever Positions . 181
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 183
....................Shift Lock Release . 184
Continuously Variable
................Transmission (CVT) . 185
.........Maximum Allowable Speed . 187
...........................................Parking . 188
..............................Parking Tips . 188
.....................The Braking System . 189
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 189
...............Brake System Design . 190
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 190
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 191
........................ABS Indicator . 192
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 193
...........................Towing a Trailer . 194
Driving
Driving
175
00/08/10 12:19:00 31S5P600_178
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your car.
1.
2.
3.
4. 9.
10.
8.
7.
6.
5.
11.
12.
90
75
16
59
99
177
Preparing to Drive
Driving
176
00/08/10 12:19:13 31S5P600_179
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again. An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
Starting the Engine
Driving
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
177
00/08/10 12:19:28 31S5P600_180
The manual transmission is syn-
chronizedinallforwardgearsfor
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse. When shifting up or
down,makesureyoupushtheclutch
pedal down all the way, shift to the
next gear, and let the pedal up
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the car moving. Push
down the clutch pedal, and pause for
a few seconds before shifting into
Reverse, or shift into one of the
forward gears for a moment. This
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheatingwhilegoingdowna
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the vehicle speed is low
enough that you will not activate the
engine speed limiter in the lower
gear. On HX, LX, and EX models in
the U.S., and LX and Si models in
Canada, make sure the engine speed
will not go into the tachometer’s red
zone in the lower gear before
downshifting.
5-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
178
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
00/08/10 12:19:35 31S5P600_181
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
39 mph (63 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
9mph(14km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
33 mph (53 km/h)
48 mph (77 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
engine speed by upshifting or
slowing down.
Before downshifting, make sure the
vehicle speed is low enough that you
will not activate the engine speed
limiter in the lower gear.
Cruise from acceleration
On HX, LX and EX models in the U.S.,
LXandSimodelsinCanada
On DX model
5-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
179
00/08/10 12:19:46 31S5P600_182
Your Honda’s transmission has four
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid acceler-
ation and have the transmission
checkedbyanauthorizedHonda
dealer as soon as possible.
To operate the HX model’s
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT), refer to page .185
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Position Indicator
180
UU..SS..:: LLXX,, EEXX,, CCaannaaddaa:: LLXX,, SSii
DDXX
00/08/10 12:19:55 31S5P600_183
CONTINUED
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
The shift lever has six positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D , 2, N or R, press firmly on the
brake pedal, and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Positions
Park (P)
181
00/08/10 12:20:04 31S5P600_184
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Press the release button
before shifting into Reverse from
Neutral.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the car for
any reason. Press on the brake pedal
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
184
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Reverse (R)
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
182
00/08/10 12:20:12 31S5P600_185
−−This position is similar
to D , except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D , you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one
or two gears, depending on your
speed.
To shift to Second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
engine speed by upshifting or
slowing down.
4
3
3
3
4
OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,LX
andSimodelsinCanada
On DX model
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Drive (D ) Engine Speed LimiterSecond (2)
3
183
00/08/10 12:20:20 31S5P600_186
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the Parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver
or small metal plate (neither are
included in the tool kit) to remove
the cover. Carefully pry off the
edge of the cover.
Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then reinstall
thecover.Makesurethenotchon
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Honda dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lock Release
184
RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN
SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK
RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT
CCOOVVEERR
00/08/10 12:20:33 31S5P600_187
Honda’s Continuously Variable
automatic transmission’s unique
design provides a smooth, constant
flow of power. It is electronically
controlled for more precise operation
and better fuel economy.
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid acceler-
ation and have the transmission
checkedbyanauthorizedHonda
dealer as soon as possible.
The shift lever has six positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, S, L, N or R, press firmly on the
brake pedal and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
CONTINUED
On HX model
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Driving
185
00/08/10 15:27:12 31S5P600_188
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
This position
mechanically locks the transmission.
Use Park whenever you are turning
off or starting the engine. To shift
outofPark,youmustpressonthe
brake pedal, have your foot off the
accelerator pedal, and press the
releasebuttononthefrontofthe
shift lever.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.184
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
StoL
LtoS
StoD
DtoS
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Driving
Park (P)
186
00/08/10 12:20:52 31S5P600_189
To shift from Re-
verse to Park, see the explanation
under Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop
first. Press the release button before
shifting into Reverse from Neutral.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Always shift to
Park position if you need to leave the
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from Neutral to
another position.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically adjusts to keep
the engine at the best speed for
driving conditions. To help the
engine warm up faster, the transmis-
sion will select ratios that allow the
engine to run at higher speeds when
it is cold.
Selecting Second
shifts the transmission into a lower
range of ratios for better accelera-
tion and increased engine braking.
Use Second when you are going
down a steep hill, or in stop-and-go
driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD,S
or L, the transmission will
automatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lower
range of ratios by pushing the
accelerator pedal to the floor.
The CVT shifts automatically to
maintain proper engine speed in any
shift position.
When the vehicle reaches the
maximum speed in any shift position,
you may feel the engine cut in and
out. This is caused by a limiter (112
mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
speed below the maximum.
To shift to Low, press
the release button on the front of the
shift lever. Use Low to get more
power when climbing, and for
maximum engine braking when
going down steep hills.
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Driving
Reverse (R)
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Second (S)
Maximum Allowable Speeds
Low (L)
187
00/08/10 12:21:03 31S5P600_190
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your car. The indicator on
the instrument panel shows that the
parking brake is not fully released; it
does not indicate that the parking
brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe
parking brake is set firmly or your
car may roll if it is parked on an
incline.
If your car has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park.Thiskeepsthecarfrom
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission making it easier to
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away.
If the car is facing uphill, turn the
front wheels away from the curb. If
you have a manual transmission, put
it in first gear.
If the car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels toward the curb. If you
have a manual transmission, put it in
reverse gear.
Parking Tips
Driving
Parking
188
00/08/10 12:21:15 31S5P600_191
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
All Civics are equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels are drum. A power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on
the brake pedal.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. They make a
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
The front disc brakes on all models
have audible brake wear indicators.
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
189
00/08/10 12:21:23 31S5P600_192
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal, it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
The U.S. EX model has an Anti-lock
Brake System (ABS) as standard
equipment.
ABS helps to prevent the wheels
from locking up and skidding during
hard braking, allowing you to retain
steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straightaheadeventhoughyouturn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the
brake pedal,
The Braking System
Driving
190
FFrroonntt
00/08/10 12:21:33 31S5P600_193
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
it
only helps with steering control
during braking. You should always
maintain a safe following distance
from other vehicles.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your car to veer into
oncoming traffic or off the road.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
CONTINUED
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the car,
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Important Safety Reminders
The Braking System
Driving
191
00/08/10 12:21:41 31S5P600_194
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your car as soon as possible.
62
ABS Indicator
The Braking System
Driving
192
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:21:47 31S5P600_195
Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defrosters and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
page ).
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions
require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your car well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these
conditions.
Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your car longer to
react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills. 109
CONTINUED
VisibilityDriving Technique
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
193
00/08/10 12:21:56 31S5P600_196
Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
Towing a TrailerTraction
Driving in Bad Weather, Towing a Trailer
Driving
194
00/08/10 12:22:04 31S5P600_197
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your car well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 196
.Important Safety Precautions . 197
.................Maintenance Schedule . 198
....................Maintenance Record . 205
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207
..............................Fluid Locations . 208
......................................Engine Oil . 209
..................................Adding Oil . 209
....................Recommended Oil . 209
..............................Synthetic Oil . 210
....................................Additives . 210
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 211
.............................Cooling System . 213
............Adding Engine Coolant . 213
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 215
....................Windshield Washers . 219
.......................Transmission Fluid . 220
Automatic
.........................Transmission . 220
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 222
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 223
............................Brake System . 223
...........................Clutch System . 223
..............................Power Steering . 224
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225
....................................Hood Latch . 226
....................................Spark Plugs . 227
..............................Replacement . 227
............................Specifications . 229
...........................................Battery . 230
.................................Wiper Blades . 232
..............Air Conditioning System . 234
.................Air Conditioning Filter . 235
.....................................Drive Belts . 237
....................................Timing Belt . 237
...............................................Tires . 238
......................................Inflation . 238
Recommended Tire Pressures
...........for Normal Driving . 239
..................................Inspection . 240
..............................Maintenance . 240
.............................Tire Rotation . 241
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 242
......................Wheels and Tires . 243
..........................Winter Driving . 243
.............................Snow Tires . 243
...................Traction Devices . 244
.............................................Lights . 245
.....................Headlight Aiming . 247
........................Replacing Bulbs . 250
...........................Storing Your Car . 254
311
Maintenance
Maintenance
195
00/08/10 12:22:12 31S5P600_198
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Regularly maintaining your car is the
best way to protect your investment.
Proper maintenance is essential to
your safety and the safety of your
passengers. It will also reward you
with more economical, trouble-free
driving and help reduce air pollution.
Maintenance
Maintenance Safety
196
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this car
or failing to correct a problem
before driving can cause a
crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
00/08/10 12:22:18 31S5P600_199
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your car is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
197
00/08/10 12:22:27 31S5P600_200
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your car
serviced and what things need
attention. It is essential that you have
your car serviced as scheduled to
retain its high level of safety,
dependability, and emissions control
performance.
Avoidexceedingyourcarsload
limit.Thisputsexcessstresson
the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your car. The load
limit is shown on the label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your car on reasonable
roads within the legal speed limit.
Drive your car regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
car as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Service your car according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your car
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving.
Driving with a roof rack, or driving
in mountainous conditions.162
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
U.S. Owners
198
00/08/10 12:22:40 31S5P600_201
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
or NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’
condition, you should follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your car best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
U.S. Vehicles:
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Canadian Owners
199
00/08/10 12:22:49 31S5P600_202
##
Maintenance
200
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
10
16
50
80
70
112
110
176
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension components
Driveshaft boots, Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace air conditioning filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 84 months
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Service the following items at the recommended intervals
20
32
30
48
40
64
80
128
90
144
100
160
120
192
60
96
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 months
Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 months
Every 36 months (independent of mileage)
24 48 7212 36 60
:
1:
2:
MT
AT
CVT
199
1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
00/08/10 12:23:08 31S5P600_203
Maintenance
201
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A
B
C
D
E
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace air conditioning filter.
Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000
km (independent of time).
Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of
mileage).
10,000 mil/16,000 km/1 yr
20,000 mil/32,000 km/1 yr
30,000 mil/48,000 km/2 yrs
40,000 mil/64,000 km/2 yrs
50,000 mil/80,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mil/96,000 km/3 yrs
70,000 mil/112,000 km/4 yrs
80,000 mil/128,000 km/4 yrs
90,000 mil/144,000 km/5 yrs
100,000 mil/160,000 km/5 yrs
Every 110,000 mil/176,000 km,
otherwise adjust only if noisy
110,000 mil/176,000 km
110,000 mil/176,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mil/176,000 km/7 yrs
120,000 mil/192,000 km/6 yrs
At 120,000 mil/192,000 km or
120 months,
thereafter every 60,000 mil/
96,000 km or 60 months
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
DoitemsinA,C,D.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,
Replace transmission fluid (CVT) .
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
DoitemsinA,C,D.
Do items in A, B.
Replace transmission fluid (CVT) .
Inspect valve clearance.
Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, E.
Replace timing belt, inspect water pump.
Inspect idle speed.
Replace transmission fluid (MT/AT ).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace engine coolant.
198
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, then every
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 months
Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every
40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 months
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
1:
2:
:
199
2
2
1
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
00/08/10 12:23:20 31S5P600_204
##
#*
Maintenance
202
Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 84 months
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,
otherwise use normal schedule
Service the following items at the recommended intervals
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)
Replace engine oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Lubricate all door hinges, locks and latches, include the hood
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check engine oil and coolant
Visually inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Replace air conditioning filter
Replace transmission fluid
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
20
32
10
16
30
48
40
64
50
80
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
60
96
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 36 months, then every 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 24 months
Every 36 months (independent of mileage)
24 48 7212 36 60
MT
AT
CVT
1:
2:
3:
:
235
237
199
1
2
3
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
00/08/10 12:23:41 31S5P600_205
CONTINUED
Maintenance
203
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A
B
C
D
E
F
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
Refer to page 198 to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Replace engine oil.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 237).
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Replace air cleaner element.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (inc
l
uding ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace air conditioning filter .
Replace brake fluid every 3 years independent of
milage.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
DoitemsinA,E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,D,E.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
DoitemsinA,E,F.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (CVT).
Replace transmission fluid (MT, AT).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, E.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (AT).
DoitemsinA,B,D,E.
5,000 mil/8,000 km/6 mos
10,000 mil/16,000 km/1 yr
15,000 mil/24,000 km/1-½ yrs
20,000 mil/32,000 km/1 yr
25,000 mil/40,000 km/2 yrs
30,000 mil/48,000 km/2 yrs
35,000 mil/56,000 km
40,000 mil/64,000 km
45,000 mil/72,000 km/3 yrs
50,000 mil/80,000 km
55,000 mil/88,000 km
At 60,000 mil/96,000 km
or 36 months,
thereafter every 40,000 mil/
64,000 km or 24 months
60,000 mil/96,000 km/3 yrs
65,000 mil/104,000 km/4 yrs
70,000 mil/112,000 km
75,000 mil/120,000 km
80,000 mil/128,000 km/4 yrs
85,000 mil/136,000 km/5 yrs
90,000 mil/144,000 km
1
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
00/08/10 12:23:51 31S5P600_206
/2-½ yrs
/2 yrs
/3 yrs
/3-½ yrs
/4 yrs
/4-½ yrs
/5 yrs
E.
Maintenance
204
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
information under special driving conditions.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, if noisy.
NOTE:
237
1: See air conditioning filter on page235 for replacement
2:
:
199
95,000 mi/152,000 km
100,000 mi/160,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/6 yrs
110,000 mil/176,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs
115,000 mi/184,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
DoitemsinA,E,F.
Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.
Replace spark plugs.
Replace timing belt , inspect water pump.
Inspect idle speed.
#*
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (MT, AT).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,
Replace engine coolant.
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
00/08/10 12:23:59 31S5P600_207
/5-½ yrs
/5 yrs
100,000 mi/160,000 km
/5 yrs
Replace transmission fluid (CVT).
110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs
/6-½ yrs
/10 yrs
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
205
5,000 mi
10,000 mi
15,000 mi
20,000 mi
25,000 mi
30,000 mi
35,000 mi
40,000 mi
45,000 mi
50,000 mi
55,000 mi
60,000 mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
8,000 km
16,000 km
24,000 km
32,000 km
(or 1 year)
40,000 km
48,000 km
56,000 km
64,000 km
(or 2 years)
72,000 km
80,000 km
88,000 km
96,000 km
(or 3 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
202
200
00/08/10 12:24:08 31S5P600_208
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
206
65,000 mi
70,000 mi
75,000 mi
80,000 mi
85,000 mi
90,000 mi
95,000 mi
100,000 mi
105,000 mi
110,000 mi
115,000 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
104,000 km
112,000 km
120,000 km
128,000 km
(or 4 years)
136,000 km
144,000 km
152,000 km
160,000 km
(or 5 years)
168,000 km
176,000 km
184,000 km
192,000 km
(or 6 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
00/08/10 12:24:18 31S5P600_209
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
youfillthefueltank.Seepage .
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
166
167
219
220
223
238
245
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
207
00/08/10 12:24:27 31S5P600_210
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
208
CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD
((GGrraayy ccaapp))
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
FFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((YYeellllooww lloooopp))
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((OOrraannggee lloooopp))
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
FFIILLLL CCAAPP
EENNGGIINNEE
CCOOOOLLAANNTT
RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN FFLLUUIIDD
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK ((CCVVTT))
((YYeellllooww lloooopp))
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG
FFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
((BBlluuee ccaapp))
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
((GGrraayy ccaapp))
00/08/10 12:24:33 31S5P600_211
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
CONTINUED
Recommended OilAdding Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
209
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
FFIILLLL CCAAPP
AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL
00/08/10 12:24:43 31S5P600_212
The SAE number tells you the oil’s
viscosity or weight. Select the oil for
your vehicle according to this chart.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30
oil may be used. However, it should
be replaced with 5W-20 at the next
oil change.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
Additives
210
AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree
00/08/10 12:24:52 31S5P600_213
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
4.
3.
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
211
WWAASSHHEERR
OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR
DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT
00/08/10 12:25:04 31S5P600_214
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes and check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)
(U.S.: EX)
(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)
(U.S.: EX, HX)
Engine Oil
Maintenance
212
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
3.4 US qt (3.2
, 2.8 Imp qt)
3.7 US qt (3.5
, 3.1 Imp qt)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
00/08/10 12:25:14 31S5P600_215
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
This coolant should always be a
mixtureof50percentantifreezeand
50 percent water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing.
If it is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
1.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
213
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
00/08/10 12:25:25 31S5P600_216
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
nents.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cooling System
Maintenance
214
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
00/08/10 12:25:34 31S5P600_217
CONTINUED
Remove the radiator cap.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Turn off the
ignition. Open the hood. Make
sure the engine and radiator are
cool to the touch.
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard. Remove the drain
bolt and washer from the engine
block.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic.
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
1. 3.
2.
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
215
00/08/10 12:25:45 31S5P600_218
Disconnect the battery cables
from the terminals. Disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, then
the positive ( ) cable.
Remove the bolt and nut, then
remove the battery case.
Remove the reserve tank
mounting bolt. Remove the
reserve tank and drain the coolant.
Put the tank back in place, making
sure its bottom tab is in the holder.
Reinstall the bolt.
Reinstall the battery and battery
case. Secure them with the bolt
and nut.
Reconnect the battery cables to
the terminals. Connect the positive
( ) cable first, then the negative
()cable.
Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Remove the battery.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the audio system will
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’
in the frequency display. Use the
Preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code (see page ).
4.
6.
7.
5.
8.
9.
159
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Si
Cooling System
Maintenance
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
216
NNUUTT BBOOLLTT
BBOOLLTT
TTAABB
00/08/10 15:27:26 31S5P600_219
Tightening torque:
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainpluginthe
bottom of the radiator. Apply non-
hardening sealant to the drain bolt
threads, put a new washer on the
drain bolt, and reinstall the drain
bolt in the engine block. Tighten it
securely.
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
The cooling system capacity is:10.
11.
CONTINUED
With 5-speed manual transmission:
With automatic transmission:
With automatic transmission (CVT):
Cooling System
Maintenance
217
FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK
FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree
58 lbf·ft (78 N·m , 8.0 kgf·m)
1.03 US gal (3.9
, 0.86 Imp gal)
1.00 US gal (3.8
, 0.84 Imp gal)
1.00 US gal (3.8
, 0.84 Imp gal)
00/08/10 15:27:38 31S5P600_220
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on two
times. Then stop the engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine.
Check the level in the radiator,
add coolant if needed.
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Cooling System
Maintenance
218
00/08/10 12:26:20 31S5P600_221
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the driver’s side
headlight. Check the reservoir’s fluid
level by removing the cap and
looking at the level gauge attached
to the cap.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).63
On Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
219
LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your car’s paint,
while a vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
00/08/10 12:26:29 31S5P600_222
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait at least 60 seconds,
andnomorethan90seconds,
after shutting off the engine to
check the fluid level.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
220
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
UUPPPPEERR
MMAARRKK
LLOOWWEERR
MMAARRKK
UUPPPPEERR
MMAARRKK
LLOOWWEERR
MMAARRKK
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK ((CCVVTT))
CCVVTT
00/08/10 12:26:39 31S5P600_223
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the filler hole
to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
5. 6.
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
221
00/08/10 12:26:47 31S5P600_224
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an API service SG, SH or SJ
grade motor oil with a viscosity of
SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a
temporary replacement. An SG
grade is preferred, but an SH or SJ
grade may be used if SG is not
available. However, motor oil does
not contain the proper additives and
continued use can cause stiffer
shifting. Replace as soon as it is
convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Check the fluid level in the reser-
voirs monthly. There are up to two
reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
The brake fluid should be replaced
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the car sitting on
level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual Transmis-
sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts to
run out of the hole. Reinstall the
filler bolt and tighten it securely.
5-speed Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
222
FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT
CCoorrrreecctt LLeevveell
00/08/10 12:26:56 31S5P600_225
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
The fluid should be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the side of
the reservoir. If it is not, add brake
fluid to bring it up to that level. Use
the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
Always use Honda DOT 3 brake
fluid. If it is not available, you should
useonlyDOT3orDOT4fluid,from
a sealed container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
DOT 3 brake fluid as soon as
possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your car’s braking
system and can cause extensive
damage.
Brake System Clutch System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
223
MMAAXX
MMIINN
MMIINN
MMAAXX
00/08/10 12:27:07 31S5P600_226
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
You should check the fluid level in
the power steering reservoir at least
once a year. Check the level when
the engine is cold. Look at the side
of the reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Power Steering
Maintenance
224
UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL
LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
00/08/10 12:27:14 31S5P600_227
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing in the engine
compartment.
To replace it:
Loosen the seven bolts and
remove the air cleaner housing
cover.
Remove the old air cleaner
element. Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, tighten the seven bolts.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
Replacement
Maintenance
Air Cleaner Element
225
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT
BBOOLLTTSS
BBOOLLTTSS
00/08/10 12:27:25 31S5P600_228
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts, including the pivot.
Follow the time and distance
recommendations in the
Maintenance Schedule. If you are
not sure how to clean and grease the
latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Maintenance
Hood Latch
226
PPIIVVOOTTSS
00/08/10 12:27:30 31S5P600_229
The spark plugs in your car should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Remove the cover by turning the
two clips one quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Use a wrench to remove the nut
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
Replacement
227
CCLLIIPPSS
00/08/10 12:27:40 31S5P600_230
Put the new spark plug into the
socket; then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
5. 6. 7.
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
228
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
00/08/10 12:27:48 31S5P600_231
Spark Plug Gap:
Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Repeat this procedure for the
other three spark plugs.
Reinstall the cover.
Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the nut.
NGK:
DENSO:
8.
11.
10.
9.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
Specifications:
229
PZFR6F-11
PKJ20CR-M11
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
0
0.1 mm
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
00/08/10 12:27:58 31S5P600_232
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
Check the condition of your car’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Battery
Maintenance
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
230
TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW
00/08/10 12:28:06 31S5P600_233
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s
electrical system.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the audio system will
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’
in the frequency display. Use the
Preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code (see page ).159
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Si
Battery
Maintenance
231
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
car’s electronic controls. Detach the
battery cables before connecting the
battery to a charger.
00/08/10 12:28:14 31S5P600_234
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold it in while you
push the blade assembly toward
thebaseofthearm.
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
To replace the blade:
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
232
WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS
LLOOCCKK TTAABB
00/08/10 12:28:22 31S5P600_235
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
233
BBLLAADDEE
BBLLAADDEE
RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT
00/08/10 12:28:31 31S5P600_236
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed
system. Any major maintenance,
such as recharging, should be done
by a qualified mechanic. You can do
a couple of things to make sure the
air conditioning works efficiently.
295
On U.S. LX and EX, Canadian LX
models
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
234
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
refrigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or soft-bristle brush to clean them.
00/08/10 12:28:39 31S5P600_237
To replace it:
The air conditioning filter is located
behind the glove box.
Open the glove box. Remove the
hooks on the side panels by pulling
out on the tabs. Pivot the glove
box out of the way.
Remove the air conditioning filter
cover by pushing in on the lock tab,
then pulling the cover toward you.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system becomes
less than usual.
The air conditioning filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
andcoolingsystem.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
On U.S. LX and EX models, and LX
model in Canada
Maintenance
Replacement
Air Conditioning Filter
235
HHOOOOKKSS
TTAABB
CCOOVVEERR
00/08/10 12:28:49 31S5P600_238
Remove the first filter by pulling it
straight out of the air conditioning
unit. Remove the second filter by
sliding it to the left, then pulling it
out.
Install the new filters. Reinstall the
cover.
Pivot the glove box up into
position. Reinstall the hooks into
thesidepaneloftheglovebox.
Close the glove box.
3.
4.
5.
Maintenance
Air Conditioning Filter
236
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG FFIILLTTEERRSS
00/08/10 12:28:56 31S5P600_239
−−
−−
−−
−−
Check the tension of each belt by
pushingonitwithyourthumb
midway between the pulleys.
The belts should have the following
‘‘play’’ or deflection. The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your car in one or
more of these conditions:
Check the condition of the two drive
belts. Examine the edges of each
belt for cracks or fraying.
Power steering belt:
Alternator belt
(On cars without A/C):
Compressor belt
(On cars with A/C):
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
0.20 0.30 in (5.0 7.5 mm)
Drive Belts Timing Belt
Drive Belts, Timing Belt
Maintenance
237
AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT
0.35 0.49 in (9.0 12.5 mm)
0.22 0.31 in (5.5 8.0 mm)
00/08/10 12:29:09 31S5P600_240
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your car, your tires
must be the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread,
and correctly inflated. The following
pages give more detailed information
on how and when to check air
pressure, how to inspect your tires
for damage and wear, and what to do
when your tires need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your car
ride more harshly, are more prone to
damage from road hazards, and wear
unevenly.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the car
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the car
before checking the tire pressure,
the tires can still be considered
‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the car has been driven
several miles), you will see readings
4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Inflation
Tires
Maintenance
238
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
00/08/10 12:29:18 31S5P600_241
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
These pressures are also given on
thetireinformationlabelonthe
driver’s doorjamb.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
(U.S.: EX, Canada: Si)
(U.S.: DX, HX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
239
P185/65R15 86H 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1
kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1
kgf/cm
)
P185/70R14 87S
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
00/08/10 15:27:51 31S5P600_242
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Excessive tread wear.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
Your car’s tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Inspection Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
240
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:29:41 31S5P600_243
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your car’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
241
((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
FFrroonntt FFrroonntt
Improper wheel weights can damage
your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only
Genuine Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
00/08/10 12:29:49 31S5P600_244
The tires that came with your car
were selected to match the perform-
ance capabilities of the car while
providing the best combination of
handling, ride comfort, and long life.
Youshouldreplacethemwithradial
tires of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your car’s handling.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the car. Tire size and
construction can affect wheel speed
and may cause the system to work
inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your car. Replacement
wheels are available at your Honda
dealer.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
242
Installing improper tires on your
car can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
00/08/10 12:29:57 31S5P600_245
Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your car’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your car’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
(U.S.: HX)
(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)
(U.S.: DX, HX, LX, Canada: DX,
LX)
(U.S.: EX, Canada: Si)
(U.S.: EX, Canada: Si)
296
CONTINUED
Snow Tires
Wheels and Tires Winter Driving
Tires
Maintenance
243
14x51/2JJ
15x6JJ
14x5V2JJ
P185/70R14 87S
P185/65R15 86H
00/08/10 12:30:10 31S5P600_246
Mount traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Install
them only on the front tires.
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
When installing traction devices,
follow the manufacturer’s
instructions and mount them as
tightlyasyoucan.Driveslowlywith
them installed. If you hear them
coming in contact with the body or
chassis, stop and investigate. Make
sure the traction devices are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brakes or
suspension.
Remove them as soon as you start
driving on cleared roads.
Tires
Maintenance
Traction Devices
244
Cables that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage your
car’s brake lines, suspension, body, and
wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting
any part of the car.
00/08/10 12:30:17 31S5P600_247
Check the operation of your car’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
245
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT
PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR
00/08/10 12:30:23 31S5P600_248
Check the following:
Ifyoufindanybulbsareburnedout,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determinewhattypeofreplacement
bulb is needed.
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount stop light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
295
Lights
Maintenance
246
BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTTSSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT
SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT
SSTTOOPP LLIIGGHHTT
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT
LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE
LLIIGGHHTTSS
00/08/10 15:29:34 31S5P600_249
Open the hood.
If you need to change the head-
light bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the power steering
reservoir tank by pulling it out of
its holder.
Your car has halogen headlight
bulbs, one on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
base and protect the glass from
contactwithyourskinorhard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your car was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
1.
CONTINUED
Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming
Lights
Maintenance
247
HHOOLLDDEERR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
00/08/10 12:30:40 31S5P600_250
If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
Reinstall the power steering
reservoir.
(Driver’s side)
Push the electrical connector onto
the tabs of the new bulb. Make
sure it locks in place.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector on both sides to unlock
the tab. Pull the connector straight
off.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal and Parking Light
Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
248
WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL BBUULLBB
CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE
00/08/10 12:30:52 31S5P600_251
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover back.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the holding clip. Lock it in
placebypushingonthecenter.
3.
2. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
Maintenance
249
HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP
00/08/10 12:31:03 31S5P600_252
Open the trunk. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight/side
marker light or turn signal light.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
Remove the screw in the center of
the fastener on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
Put the fastener into the hole on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screw.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Fenders)
Lights
Maintenance
250
FFAASSTTEENNEERR
00/08/10 12:31:15 31S5P600_253
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by squeezing the tabs on
both sides of the socket.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.
Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
2.
1.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
251
00/08/10 12:31:27 31S5P600_254
Put the light assembly back into
thehole,rightsidefirst.Pushon
the left side until it snaps into
place.
Pull the bulb straight out of the
holder. Push the new bulb straight
into the holder until it bottoms.
Remove the trunk light assembly
by using a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to pry carefully on the
left edge of the assembly.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Reinstall the socket back in place
by pushing it in until it latches.
2.
3.
1.
3.
4.
Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
252
00/08/10 12:31:35 31S5P600_255
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens in
the middle with a fingernail file or
a small flat-tip screwdriver. Do not
pry on the edge of the housing
around the lens.
Although the ceiling light and
spotlights come apart the same way,
theydonotusethesametypeof
bulbs.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
Spotlights:
Pry on the edge between the lenses.
2.
3.
1.
On LX models
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Lights
Lights
Maintenance
253
CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT
FFRROONNTT CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT
LLXX
SSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTTSS
UU..SS..:: EEXX,, CCaannaaddaa:: SSii
00/08/10 12:31:46 31S5P600_256
Block the rear wheels.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(5-speed manual) or Park
(automatic).
If you need to park your car for an
extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your car back on the road. If
possible, store your car indoors.
If the car is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Coverthecarwitha‘breathable
cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton.
Nonporous materials, such as
plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your car for 12 months
or longer, have your Honda dealer
perform the inspections called for in
the24monthsmaintenanceschedule
(Normal Conditions) as soon as you
take it out of storage (see page ).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the car has actually
reached that time or mileage.
211
200
Storing Your Car
Maintenance
254
00/08/10 12:32:00 31S5P600_257
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your car and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 256
.....................................Washing . 256
.......................................Waxing . 257
..........................Paint Touch-up . 257
..................................Interior Care . 258
...................................Carpeting . 258
.................................Floor Mats . 258
.........................................Fabric . 259
...........................................Vinyl . 259
...................................Seat Belts . 259
....................................Windows . 260
..........................Air Fresheners . 260
....................Corrosion Protection . 261
.................................Body Repairs . 262
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
255
00/08/10 12:32:05 31S5P600_258
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwners
Manual.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Frequent washing helps preserve
your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can
scratch the paint, while tree sap and
bird droppings can permanently ruin
the finish.
Wash your car in a shady area, not in
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in
the sun, move it into the shade and
let the exterior cool down before you
start.
Rinse the car thoroughly with cool
water to remove loose dirt.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Wash the car using the water and
detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the car does not need waxing.
257
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
256
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your car.
00/08/10 12:32:16 31S5P600_259
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Always wash and dry the whole car
before waxing it. You should wax
your car, including the metal trim,
whenever water sits on the surface
in large patches. It should form into
beads or droplets after waxing.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the car does not
need waxing.
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your car frequently for chips
or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing Paint Touch-up
257
00/08/10 12:32:26 31S5P600_260
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If you replace it, use a genuine
Honda floor mat that is designed to
be used with the floor mat anchor in
your car.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your car.
The genuine Honda driver’s floor
mat was designed to hook over the
floor mat anchor. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If equipped
Carpeting Floor Mats
Appearance Care
Interior Care
258
00/08/10 12:32:35 31S5P600_261
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethecar.
Fabric
Vinyl
Seat Belts
Interior Care
Appearance Care
259
LLOOOOPP
00/08/10 12:32:44 31S5P600_262
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your car,
it is best to use a solid type. Some
liquid air fresheners contain chemi-
cals that may cause parts of the
interior trim and fabric to crack or
discolor.
Windows Air Fresheners
Interior Care
Appearance Care
260
The rear window def ogger and
antenna wires are bonded to the inside
of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-
down can dislodge and break these
wires. When cleaning the rear window,
use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-
side.
00/08/10 12:32:52 31S5P600_263
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your car:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
car stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the car.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your car from corroding
by performing some simple periodic
maintenance:
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your car. This is
especially important in areas that
useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa
good idea in humid climates and
areas subject to salt air. Cars
equipped with ABS have a sensor
and wiring at each wheel. Be
careful not to damage them.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
car inspected and repaired
periodically.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
261
00/08/10 12:33:02 31S5P600_264
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Honda parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Takeyourcartoyourauthorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body repairs can affect your car’s
resistance to corrosion. If your car
needs repairs after a collision, pay
close attention to the parts used in
the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Honda replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Honda body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
262
00/08/10 12:33:08 31S5P600_265
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your car towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 264
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 271
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very
.....................................Slowly . 271
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 272
................................Jump Starting . 273
............If Your Engine Overheats . 275
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 278
..........Charging System Indicator . 279
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 280
.......................Readiness Codes . 281
...............Brake System Indicator . 282
..................Closing the Moonroof . 283
..............................................Fuses . 284
..........Checking and Replacing . 285
......................Emergency Towing . 290
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
263
00/08/10 12:33:13 31S5P600_266
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
shouldbethesamesizeanddesign
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
Your car has a compact spare tire
that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your car as soon as you can.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your car. Do not use your spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
264
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
00/08/10 12:33:24 31S5P600_267
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Park the car on firm, level and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park (automatic) or Reverse
(manual). Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the car while
you change the tire.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR
TTOOOOLL KKIITT JJAACCKK
The car can easily roll off the
jack, seriously injuring anyone
underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the car when it
is supported only by the jack.
00/08/10 12:33:34 31S5P600_268
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Loosen the four wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Find the jacking point nearest the
wheel you are removing. Place the
jack under the jacking point. Turn
the end bracket clockwise until
the top of the jack contacts the
jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.
6. 7. 8.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
266
JJAACCKK
WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH
JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTTSS
00/08/10 12:33:42 31S5P600_269
CONTINUED
Remove the wheel nuts and wheel
cover. The wheel cover cannot be
removed without first removing
the wheel nuts. Do not attempt to
forcibly pry the wheel cover off
with a screwdriver or other tool.
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the car
until the flat tire is off the ground.
Remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
9. 10. 11.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
267
WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN
WWHHEEEELL
NNUUTTSS
WWHHEEEELL CCOOVVEERR
WWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS
00/08/10 12:33:51 31S5P600_270
Lower the car to the ground and
remove the jack.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
12. 13.
14.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
268
BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB
00/08/10 12:33:59 31S5P600_271
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Place the flat tire face down in the
sparetirewell.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
15. 16. 17.
18.
19.
CONTINUED
On HX model in the U.S., Si model in
Canada
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
269
WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT
SSPPAACCEERR
CCOONNEE
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
00/08/10 12:34:10 31S5P600_272
Store the jack in the trunk with the
end bracket on the left side. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tool kit.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
20.
21.
22.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
270
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack and tools
securely before driving.
00/08/10 12:34:16 31S5P600_273
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereisproba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the car from
a booster battery (see page ).
273
230
273
289
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
00/08/10 12:34:27 31S5P600_274
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Your car has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).80
177
285
289
Emergency
Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
272
00/08/10 12:34:36 31S5P600_275
If your car’s battery has run down,
you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
You cannot start a Honda with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your car, follow these
directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
1.
2.
230
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
00/08/10 12:34:46 31S5P600_276
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start your car. If the starter motor
still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-to-
metal contact.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
3. 4. 6.
5.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
274
BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY
00/08/10 12:34:55 31S5P600_277
Once your car is running, discon-
nectthenegativecablefromyour
car, then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your car, then the booster battery.
Your car can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
The pointer of your car’s tempera-
ture gauge should stay in the mid-
range under most conditions. It may
go higher if you are driving up a long
steep hill on a very hot day. If it
climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the car until all are disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
7.
CONTINUED
If Your Engine Overheats
Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
00/08/10 12:35:04 31S5P600_278
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling
system and all other accessories.
Turn on the hazard warning
indicators.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
167
289
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
276
00/08/10 12:35:13 31S5P600_279
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
8. 9.
10.
11.
12.
289
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
00/08/10 12:35:22 31S5P600_280
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Letthecarsitforaminute.Open
the hood and check the oil level
(see page ). Although oil level
and oil pressure are not directly
connected, an engine that is very
low on oil can lose pressure during
cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
1.
2.
3.
4.
166
209
289
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
278
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the car stopped.
00/08/10 12:35:31 31S5P600_281
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear
defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not
to use other electrically-operated
controls such as the power windows.
Keep the engine running and take
extra care not to stall it. Starting the
engine will discharge the battery
rapidly.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:35:37 31S5P600_282
If you have recently refueled your
car, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes one driving trip.
If the indicator remains on past one
driving trip, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the car
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your car if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your car’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your car to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
280
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your car’s emissions controls
and engine. Those repairs may not be
covered by your car’s warranties.
00/08/10 12:35:45 31S5P600_283
Your car has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your car’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your car for a
state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. To check if
they are set, turn the ignition ON (II),
but do not start the engine. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. See State
Emissions Testing on page .301
Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
00/08/10 12:35:51 31S5P600_284
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
If you must drive the car a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the car’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the car to your
dealer and have the brake system
inspected for leaks or worn brake
pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the car
begins to slow down, and you will
have to press harder on the pedal.
The distance needed to stop will be
much longer.
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
223
289
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
282
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
00/08/10 12:36:00 31S5P600_285
Use a screwdriver or coin to
remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner.
Remove the wrench. Replace the
round plug.
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
5.
6.
4.
1.
2.
3.
285
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
RROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG
SSOOCCKKEETT
00/08/10 12:36:10 31S5P600_286
All the electrical circuits in your car
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
The interior fuse box is underneath
the steering column. To open it, turn
the knobs as shown.
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side. To open it, push
thetabsasshown.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
284
TTAABB
UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD IINNTTEERRIIOORR
00/08/10 12:36:17 31S5P600_287
If something electrical in your car
stops working, the first thing you
should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
3.
1.
2.
4.
287 288
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
FFUUSSEE
BBLLOOWWNN
FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR
00/08/10 12:36:28 31S5P600_288
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
If you cannot drive the car without
fixing the problem, and you do not
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the
same rating or a lower rating from
one of the other circuits. Make sure
youcandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your car.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified mechanic.
5.
6.
159
On U.S. EX and Canadian LX and Si
models
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
286
BBLLOOWWNN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment fuse with the proper rating for the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
00/08/10 12:36:37 31S5P600_289
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
CONTINUED
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
80 A
40 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Condenser Fan
Small Light
Interior Light
Cooling Fan
Hazard
FI ECU
Horn Stop
ABS F/S
Back Up
ABS Motor
Rear Defroster
Heater Motor
Power Window
Option
Left Headlight
Door Lock
Right Headlight
Not Used
Battery
Ignition 1
Spare Fuses
21 25
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
287
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
00/08/10 12:36:44 31S5P600_290
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
: On Canadian models
1
2
3
4
5
15 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
Ignition Coil
LAF Heater
Daytime running lights
Alternator
Not Used
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Power Window Relay
Moonroof
Accessory, Radio
Not Used
Meter
ABS
Daytime running lights
SRS
Remote Control Mirrors
Not Used
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Accessory Power Socket
Turn Lights
Front Wiper
Not Used
Front Right Power Window
Front Left Power Window
Not Used
Not Used
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
288
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
00/08/10 12:36:52 31S5P600_291
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
If your car needs to be towed, call a
professional towing service or, if you
belong to one, an organization that
provides roadside assistance. Never
tow your car behind another vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your car on the back of a truck.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the car off
the ground. Your car’s suspension
and body can be seriously damaged.
If your Honda cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If due to
damage, your car must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Automatic Transmission
5-speed Manual Transmission and
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
CONTINUED
Wheel-lift Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Honda.
This is the best way to transport
your Honda.
This method of towing is
unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
289
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
car must be transported with the front
wheels of f the ground.
00/08/10 12:37:03 31S5P600_292
If you decide to tow your car with all
four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for
towing as described above, and leave
the ignition switch in Accessory (I)
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
rundownthebattery.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the car no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If your car is equipped with a front
spoiler, remove it before towing so it
is not damaged.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
290
Trying to lift or tow your car by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the car’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.
00/08/10 12:37:10 31S5P600_293
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 292
................................Specifications . 294
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.............................(U.S.Cars) .296
.................................Treadwear . 296
......................................Traction . 296
.............................Temperature . 297
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 298
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 299
.......................Emissions Controls . 300
.....................The Clean Air Act . 300
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 300
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 300
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 301
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 301
....................PGM-FI System . 301
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 301
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 301
....................Replacement Parts . 301
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302
..............State Emissions Testing . 303
....Testing of Readiness Codes . 303
Technical Information
Technical Information
291
00/08/10 12:37:15 31S5P600_294
Your car has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
car for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your car. The easiest place to find
the VIN is on a plate fastened to the
top of the dashboard. You can see it
by looking through the windshield
on the driver’s side. It is also on the
Certification label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on
the engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also provided in bar code
on the Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
292
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL
00/08/10 12:37:21 31S5P600_295
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block.
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
293
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
NNUUMMBBEERR
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
00/08/10 12:37:27 31S5P600_296
**
Specifications
Technical Information
294
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Capacities
174.7 in (4,438 mm)
66.7 in (1,695 mm)
55.1 in (1,399 mm)
103.1 in (2,620 mm)
57.9 in (1,470 mm)
57.9 in (1,470 mm)
2.95 x 3.72 in (75.0 x 94.4 mm)
13.2 US gal (50 , 11.0 Imp gal)
101.7 cu-in (1,668 cm )
9.5
9.9
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC , SOHC VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
See spark plug maintenance
section page 225 .
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.108 US gal (0.41
, 0.090 Imp gal)
4.8 US qt (4.5
, 4.0 Imp qt)
2.6 US qt (2.5
, 2.2 Imp qt)
6.0 US qt (5.7
, 5.0 Imp qt)
6.3 US qt (6.0
, 5.3 Imp qt)
3.3 US qt (3.1
, 2.7 Imp qt)
2.9 US qt (2.7
, 2.4 Imp qt)
1.7 US qt (1.6
, 1.4 Imp qt)
1.6 US qt (1.5
, 1.3 Imp qt)
4.4 US qt (4.2
, 3.7 Imp qt)
3.5 US qt (3.3
, 2.9 Imp qt)
3.2 US qt (3.0
, 2.6 Imp qt)
3.7 US qt (3.5
, 3.1 Imp qt)
3.4 US qt (3.2
, 2.8 Imp qt)
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
1.03 US gal (3.9
, 0.86 Imp gal)
1.00 US gal (3.8
, 0.84 Imp gal)
1.00 US gal (3.8
, 0.84 Imp gal)
1.32 US gal (5.0 , 1.10 Imp gal)
1.29 US gal (4.9
, 1.08 Imp gal)
1.29 US gal (4.9
, 1.08 Imp gal)
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
U.S.: DX, LX
Canada: DX, LX
U.S.: HX, EX
Canada: Si
5:
1:
2:
3:
4:
HX
DX, LX
EX, HX
Change
Manual
Automatic
CVT
Total
Manual
Automatic
CVT
Change
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Cars
Canada Cars
12
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
5
Manual trans-
mission fluid
Including filter
Windshield
washer reservoir
00/08/10 15:29:55 31S5P600_297
−−
−−
Specifications
Technical Information
295
Battery
Fuses
Tires
Alignment
Air Conditioning
Lights
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
SP-10
12 V
12 V
60/55 W (HB2)
21/5 W
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)12 V 5 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 21 W
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 36 AH/5 HRCapacity
Interior
Under-hood
Size
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 1°33’
45’
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
T115/70D14 88M
P185/65R15 86H
P185/70R14 87S
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type
See page 285 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 284 or the fuse box
cover.
0.08 in ( 2.0 mm)
T125/70D15 95M
Headlights (HI/LO)
Front turn signal/side marker
lights
Front parking light
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights/Rear side
marker lights
Back-up lights
Taillights
High-mount stop light
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Front ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
1:EX
2:LX
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
1:
2:
3:
U.S.: DX, HX and LX
Canada: DX, LX
U.S.: EX
Canada: Si
U.S.: EX and LX with ABS
Canada: Si
ABS equipped models (DX, LX)
1
1
2
1
2
1
3
00/08/10 12:38:11 31S5P600_298
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature perform-
ance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards.
The following explains these
gradings.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Technical Information
296
00/08/10 12:38:22 31S5P600_299
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Temperature A,B,C
Technical Information
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
297
00/08/10 12:38:27 31S5P600_300
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
ETHANOL
MTBE
METHANOL
Oxygenated Fuels
Technical Information
298
00/08/10 12:38:36 31S5P600_301
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your car back into
compliance will require the replace-
ment of several components, such as
theoxygensensorsandthethree
way catalytic converter. These re-
placements are not covered under
warranty.
Driving in Foreign Countries
Technical Information
299
00/08/10 12:38:41 31S5P600_302
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
The burning of gasoline in your car’s
engine produces several byproducts.
Some of these are carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline
evaporating from the tank also
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling
the production of NOx, CO, and HC
is important to the environment.
Under certain conditions of sunlight
and climate, NOx and HC react to
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
Your car has a Positive Crankcase
Ventilation System. This keeps
gasses that build up in the engine’s
crankcase from going into the
atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase
Ventilation valve routes them from
the crankcase back to the intake
manifold. They are then drawn into
the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
194
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
300
00/08/10 12:38:51 31S5P600_303
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your car. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lower quality parts may increase the
emissions from your car.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The exhaust emissions controls
include three systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control and Three
Way Catalytic Converter. These
three systems work together to
control the engine’s combustion and
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The
exhaust emissions control systems
are separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
2
2
Replacement PartsOnboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Exhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Ignition Timing Control System
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
301
00/08/10 12:39:04 31S5P600_304
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Park your car away from high grass,
dry leaves, or other flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your car diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
(EX) (DX, LX, HX)
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
302
TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR
00/08/10 12:39:13 31S5P600_305
CONTINUED
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(approximately3
minutes).
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not complete the
test.Thisisbecauseofcertain
‘‘readiness codes’’ that must be set in
the on-board diagnostics for the
emissions systems. These codes are
erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only
after several days of driving under a
variety of conditions.
Technical Information
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
303
00/08/10 12:39:24 31S5P600_306
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Technical Information
State Emissions Testing
304
00/08/10 12:39:29 31S5P600_307
Customer Relations
................................Information . 306
...................U.S. Zone Office Map . 307
.............Canada Zone Office Map . 308
....................Warranty Coverages . 309
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 310
.....................Authorized Manuals . 311
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
305
00/08/10 12:39:33 31S5P600_308
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Zone Office.
Refer to the U.S. and Canadian Zone
Office maps on the following pages.
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your car
Date of purchase
Mileage on your car
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
car to you
292
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Relations Information
306
00/08/10 12:39:39 31S5P600_309
Warranty and Customer Relations
U.S.ZoneOfficeMap
307
ZONE 1
ZONE 9
ZONE 6
ZONE 3
ZONE 10
ZONE 7
ZONE 5
ZONE 2
ZONE 15
ZONE 4
ZONE 2
ZONE 8
Mid-Atlantic Zone
902 Wind River Ln., Suite 200
Gaithersburg, Maryland 20878
(301) 990-2020
Southeastern Zone
P.O. Box 1606
1500 Morrison Parkway
Alpharetta, Georgia 30009-1606
(770) 442-2045
West Central Zone
1600 South Abilene Street, Suite D
Aurora, Colorado 80012
(303) 696-3935
Puerto Rico and U.S. V.I.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
(787) 250-4318
Western Zone
P.O. Box 2260
700 Van Ness Avenue
Torrance, California
90501-1490
(310) 781-4565
Northwestern Zone
P.O. Box 20186
12439 N.E. Airport Way
Portland, Oregon 97230
(503) 256-0943
(also includes Alaska and
Hawaii)
South Central Zone
4529 Royal Lane
Irving, Texas 75063
(972) 929-5481
Northeastern Zone
115 Gaither Drive
Mt. Laurel, New Jersey 08054
(856) 235-5533
Includes: NYC Metro area and
Fairfield County, CT area
Central Zone
101 South Stanfield Road
Troy, Ohio 45373
(937) 332-6250
North Central Zone
601 Campus Drive, Suite A-9
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
(847) 870-5600
New England Zone
555 Old County Road
Windsor Locks, Connecticut 06096
(860) 623-3310
See Zone 5 for: NYC Metro area and
Fairfield County, CT area
The addresses and telephone numbers are subject to change. If you cannot
reach your Zone office, ask your Honda dealer for the current information.
00/08/10 12:39:57 31S5P600_310
Canada Zone Office Map
Warranty and Customer Relations
308
Honda Canada Inc.
National Office
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
00/08/10 12:40:02 31S5P600_311
−−
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
Genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the car.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2001 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2001 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
309
00/08/10 12:40:15 31S5P600_312
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
310
00/08/10 12:40:20 31S5P600_313
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
311
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61S5A00
61S5A01
61S5A00EL
61S5A30
31S5P600
HON-R
Form Description
2001 Honda Civic 4 Door
Service Manual Base Book
2001 Honda Civic 2 Door
Service Manual Supplement
2001 Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2001 Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Body Repair Manual
2001 Honda Civic 2 Door
Owner’s Manual
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$66.00
$36.00
$46.00
$42.00
$30.00
FREE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
00/08/10 12:40:32 31S5P600_314
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
312
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
00/08/10 12:40:40 31S5P600_315
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 169
................................Accessories . 169
...Additional Safety Precaution . 170
............................Modifications . 170
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 82
.............Accessory Power Socket . 103
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 209
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 48
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225
..............Air Conditioning System . 108
......................Maintenance . 234, 235
.........................................Usage . 108
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 110
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 238
.........................Normal Driving . 239
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 298
......................................Antifreeze . 213
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
....................Indicator Light . 62, 192
...................................Operation . 190
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 82
..........................Appearance Care . 255
................Audio System . 116, 128, 140
...............Automatic Speed Control . 76
..............Automatic Transmission . 180
..........................Capacity,Fluid .294
...............Checking Fluid Level . 220
.......................................Shifting . 181
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180
................Shift Lever Positions . 181
....................Shift Lock Release . 184
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 62, 278
............................Jump Starting . 273
..............................Maintenance . 230
............................Specifications . 294
..............................Before Driving . 161
....................................Belts,Seat .8,44
...........................Beverage Holder . 102
.................................Body Repairs . 262
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 190
.............Break-in, New Linings . 162
............Bulb Replacement . 250, 251
...........................................Fluid . 223
.......................................Parking . 100
.................System Indicator . 62, 282
........................Wear Indicators . 189
.............................Braking System . 189
........................Break-in, New Car . 162
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 71
........................Brights, Headlights . 70
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 251
..............................Brake Lights . 250
..............................Ceiling Light . 253
................Front Parking Lights . 248
........Front Side Marker Lights . 248
.................................Headlights . 247
.........High-mount Brake Light . 251
.................License Plate Lights . 251
.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 250
............................Specifications . 294
...................................Spotlights . 253
...............................Trunk Light . 252
....................Turn Signal Lights . 248
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 247
Index
A
B
I
00/08/10 12:40:46 31S5P600_316
............................Capacities Chart . 294
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54
...................................Cargo Hook . 104
.............................Carrying Cargo . 171
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 158
...................Operation . 122, 134, 155
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..................CD Changer . 125, 137, 151
......................CD Player . 125, 137, 149
..................................Ceiling Light . 105
........................Certification Label . 292
............................................Chains . 244
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
............Changing Engine Coolant . 215
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 211
......................................When to . 198
...Charging System Indicator . 62, 279
............Checklist, Before Driving . 176
.....................................Child Safety . 21
Child Seats
.......................Lower Anchorage . 42
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 225
Cleaning
......................................Exterior . 256
.......................................Interior . 258
...................................Seat Belts . 259
...........................................Vinyl . 259
....................................Windows . 260
.........Clock, Setting the . 121, 133, 143
...................................Clutch Fluid . 223
........................CO in the Exhaust . 303
......................................Coat Hook . 104
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 177
..............................Compact Spare . 264
...............Consumer Information . 306
.............Controls, Instruments and . 57
Coolant
........................................Adding . 213
....................................Checking . 167
.........................Proper Solution . 213
...................................Replacing . 215
...................Temperature Gauge . 68
....................Corrosion Protection . 261
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 300
..............Cruise Control Operation . 76
..........Customer Relations Office . 306
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 58
................Daytime Running Lights . 71
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 310
........................Defog and Defrost . 113
................Defogger, Rear Window . 74
..............Defrosting the Windows . 113
....................................Dimensions . 294
...............Dimming the Headlights . 71
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 220
..................................Engine Oil . 166
..........................Directional Signals . 72
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 189
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 212
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 83
......................Power Door Locks . 84
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296
Downshifting, 5-speed Manual
.............................Transmission . 178
.....................................Drive Belts . 237
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
Index
C D
II
00/08/10 12:40:51 31S5P600_317
CONTINUED
...........................................Driving . 175
....................................Economy . 168
.........................In Bad Weather . 193
................In Foreign Countries . 299
..............................Economy, Fuel . 168
............Emergencies on the Road . 289
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 273
...........Brake System Indicator . 282
................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
.....Charging System Indicator . 279
..................Checking the Fuses . 285
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 278
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 280
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 282
..................Overheated Engine . 275
.........................Emergency Brake . 100
......................Emergency Flashers . 74
......................Emergency Towing . 289
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 89
.......................Emissions Controls . 300
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68
.................................Drive Belts . 237
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 63, 280
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 278
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 209
...............................Overheating . 275
............................Specifications . 294
.......................................Starting . 177
......Engine Speed Limiter . 179, 183
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 298
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 300
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 256
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 259
...................................Fan, Interior . 108
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 107
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 163
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 225
.......................Air Conditioning . 235
...............................................Oil . 211
5-speed Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 222
................................Shifting the . 178
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 265
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 220
..........................................Brake . 223
.........................................Clutch . 223
..............Manual Transmission . 222
..........................Power Steering . 224
..................Windshield Washer . 219
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 147
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 94
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 299
..........................Four-way Flashers . 74
.................................................Fuel . 162
......................Fill Door and Cap . 163
...........................................Gauge . 67
................Octane Requirement . 162
...............................Oxygenated . 298
........................Reserve Indicator . 63
........................Tank, Filling the . 163
Index
E
F
III
00/08/10 12:40:57 31S5P600_318
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 284
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 168
..........................................Gasohol . 298
.........................................Gasoline . 162
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63
...........................................Gauge . 67
................Octane Requirement . 162
........................Tank, Filling the . 163
................Gas Station Procedures . 163
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68
...............................................Fuel . 67
...............................Speedometer . 66
.................................Tachometer . 66
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 180
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 178
..............................Glass Cleaning . 260
......................................Glove Box . 101
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 247
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74
Headlights
............Daytime Running Lights . 71
..................High Beam Indicator . 63
........................Reminder Beeper . 70
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 250
...................................Turning on . 70
..............................Head Restraints . 92
.....................Heating and Cooling . 108
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 177
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 70
..............High-mount Brake Light . 247
....................................Hood Latch . 226
.......................Hood, Opening the . 164
..................................................Horn . 69
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 223
.................................Hydroplaning . 194
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 292
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 79
...........................................Switch . 82
............Timing Control System . 303
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Indicators, Instrument
.............................................Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 30
Infant Seats
.......................Lower Anchorage . 42
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 238
.........................Normal Driving . 239
...................................Inside Mirror . 98
.............................Inspection, Tire . 240
........................Instrument Panel . 2, 58
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71
...........................Interior Cleaning . 258
...............................Interior Lights . 105
........................................Introduction . i
........................Jacking up the Car . 265
.......................................Jack, Tire . 265
................................Jump Starting . 273
Index
G
H
I
J
IV
00/08/10 12:41:05 31S5P600_319
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 79
...................Neutral Gear Position . 182
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 162
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 179
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 292
..................................Maintenance . 195
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 207
.................................Record . 205-206
......................Required Indicator . 64
..........................................Safety . 196
.............................Schedule . 198-204
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 280
...................Manual Transmission . 178
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 222
...............................Meters, Gauges . 66
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 298
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 99
.........................................Moonroof . 98
......................Closing Manually . 283
.....................................Operation . 98
.......................Label, Certification . 292
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 44
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 247
.......................................Indicator . 59
.........................................Parking . 70
..................................Turn Signal . 72
.....................................Load Limit . 172
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 82
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 82
............................Fuel Fill Door . 163
.................................Power Door . 84
...........................................Trunk . 88
........................Low Coolant Level . 167
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63
...........................Lower Anchorage . 42
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 179
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 278
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 294
.........................................Luggage . 171
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 162
.........................................Odometer . 66
...............................Odometer, Trip . 67
Oil
........................Change, How to . 211
......................Change, When to . 198
......................Checking Engine . 166
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 278
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 210
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 83
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 301
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 299
..............................Outside Mirrors . 98
....................Overheating, Engine . 275
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 298
Index
L
M
N
O
K
V
00/08/10 12:41:12 31S5P600_320
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 44
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 310
.................................Safety Features . 7
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 44
...............Additional Information . 44
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 45
.....................................Cleaning . 259
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
..............................Paint Touch-up . 257
..............Panel Brightness Control . 71
........................Park Gear Position . 181
...........................................Parking . 188
...............................Parking Brake . 100
.................................Parking Lights . 70
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 302
.............................PGM-FI System . 301
..................Polishing and Waxing . 257
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.......Protecting Larger Children . 37
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 41
..........Using Lower Anchorages . 42
...................Radiator Overheating . 275
Radio/CD/Cassette
...........Sound System . 116, 128, 140
...................Readiness Codes . 281, 303
Rear Lights, Bulb
......................Replacement . 250, 251
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 94
............................Rear View Mirror . 99
.................Rear Window Defogger . 74
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 90
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 179
.............................Reminder Lights . 59
.......................Remote Transmitter . 85
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 225
..........................Engine Coolant . 215
................Engine Oil and Filter . 211
..........................................Fuses . 285
................................Light Bulbs . 247
....................................Schedule . 198
................................Spark Plugs . 227
................................Timing Belt . 237
...........................................Tires . 242
.............................Wiper Blades . 232
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 47
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 167, 213
...............................Restraint, Child . 21
..................Reverse Gear Position . 182
................................Rotation, Tire . 241
Index
PR
S
VI
00/08/10 12:41:18 31S5P600_321
CONTINUED
.....................................Tachometer . 66
Taillights, Changing
..............................Bulbs in . 250, 251
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 263
...................Tape Player . 122, 135, 155
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296
.....Emissions Control Systems . 300
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 298
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 302
.......................Temperature Gauge . 68
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41
............................Theft Protection . 159
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302
................................Maintenance . 46
......Reminder Light and Beeper . 61
...................System Components . 44
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 90
...............................Serial Number . 292
...........................Service Intervals . 198
...........................Service Manual . 311
.........Service Station Procedures . 163
..........Setting the Clock . 121, 133, 145
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 180
........................Shift Lock Release . 184
..............................Side Airbags . 10, 50
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.................Replacement in . 248, 250
...............................Signaling Turns . 72
.....................................Snow Tires . 243
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 257
................Sound System . 116, 128, 140
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 264
............................Specifications . 295
................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 227
....................Specifications Charts . 294
..................................Speed Control . 76
...................................Speedometer . 66
.......................................Spotlights . 106
..........SRS, Additional Information . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 53
.............................Airbag Service . 53
How the Side Airbag Indicator
............................Light Works . 52
How the SRS Indicator
.......................................Works . 51
...........How Your Airbags Work . 48
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50
........................SRS Components . 48
.............................SRS Indicator . 51, 61
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 83
........Testing of Readiness Codes . 303
.......................Starting the Engine . 177
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 177
................With a Dead Battery . 273
..............State Emissions Testing . 303
........Steam Coming from Engine . 275
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 75
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 82
...Stereo Sound System . 116, 128, 140
...........................Storing Your Car . 254
Supplemental Restraint
................................System . 10, 48
......................................Servicing . 53
.........................SRS Indicator . 51, 61
...................System Components . 44
..................................Synthetic Oil . 210
Index
T
VII
00/08/10 12:41:24 31S5P600_322
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 261
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 263
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 296
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 162
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 258
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 212
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 172
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 294
....Vehicle Identification Number . 292
.............................Vehicle Storage . 254
.....................................Ventilation . 110
.................................................VIN . 292
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 259
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 210
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55
..................Warranty Coverages . 309
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 219
.......................................Indicator . 63
.....................................Operation . 73
.........................................Washing . 256
..................Waxing and Polishing . 257
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 75
............Alignment and Balance . 240
..........................Compact Spare . 264
......................................Wrench . 265
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 260
..........Time, Setting the . 121, 133, 145
....................................Timing Belt . 237
....................................Tire Chains . 244
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 265
...............................................Tires . 238
..............................Air Pressure . 238
.........................Checking Wear . 240
..........................Compact Spare . 264
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 296
......................................Inflation . 238
..................................Inspection . 240
..............................Maintenance . 240
...................................Replacing . 242
......................................Rotating . 241
...........................................Snow . 243
............................Specifications . 295
.......................Traction Devices . 244
..................Technical Information . 291
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 265
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 194
................Emergency Wrecker . 289
...........................Traction Devices . 244
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 220
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 222
..................Fluid Selection . 220, 222
..............Identification Number . 293
.............Shifting the Automatic . 181
..................Shifting the Manual . 178
.....................................Treadwear . 296
.......................................Trip Meter . 67
................................................Trunk . 88
........................................Opening . 88
...................Open Monitor Light . 63
....................................Turn Signals . 72
Index
U
V
W
VIII
00/08/10 12:41:31 31S5P600_323
..................Operating the Power . 96
...........................Rear, Defogger . 74
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 72
...................................Defroster . 113
.......................................Washers . 73
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 232
.....................................Operation . 72
....................................Worn Tires . 240
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 289
: U.S. and Canada only
Index
IX
00/08/10 12:41:34 31S5P600_324
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Brake Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
5-speed Manual Transmission
Fluid:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
13.2 US gal (50
, 11.0 Imp gal)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2
, 2.8 Imp qt)
3.7 US qt (3.5
, 3.1 Imp qt)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Spare Tire:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an API service
SG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or
10W-40 motor oil as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Capacity (including differential):
1.6 US qt (1.5
, 1.3 Imp qt)
DX, LX
EX, HX
209
220 224
223
HX model (CVT) only:
Use Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) only
222
00/08/10 15:30:13 31S5P600_325
4

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Honda Civic - 2001 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Honda Civic - 2001 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,52 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info